SlideShare a Scribd company logo
User Manual

HiPath 3000/5000
HiPath optiClient 130
Version 4.0




May 2003




OP5374-00
Warning
Hackers who unlawfully gain access to customer telecommunications systems are criminals. Currently, we do
not know of any telecommunications system that is immune to this type of criminal activity. Siemens Informa-
tion and Communication Networks, Inc. will not accept liability for any damages, including long distance charg-
es, which result from unauthorized use. Although Siemens has designed security features into its products, it
is your sole responsibility to use the security features and to establish security practices within your company,
including training, security awareness, and call auditing.
Siemens sales and service personnel, as well as Siemens business partners, are available to work with you
to help you guard against this unauthorized use of your telecommunications system.




May 2003


Job No. 5374
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by
any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written permission of
Siemens. The software described in this publication is furnished under a license agreement and may be used
only in accordance with the terms of that agreement.
Request Siemens publications from your Siemens representative or the Siemens branch serving you. Publi-
cations are not stocked at the address below.
Siemens Information and Communication Networks, Inc.
1700 Technology Drive
San Jose, CA 95110
(408) 492-2000
1 (800) 765-6123
Fax: (408) 492-3430
Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
All other trademarks and company names are the property of their respective owners.
Copyright Siemens Information and Communication Networks, Inc. 2003. All rights reserved.
s

HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0
optiClient 130

User Manual
*1PA31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9*
1P A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9




The information in this document contains general descriptions of the technical opti-
ons available, which do not always have to be present in individual cases.
The required features should therefore be specified in each individual case at the time
of closing the contract.




 Siemens AG 2003  ●      Information and Communication Networks, Hofmannstraße 51, D-81359 München, Germany
Reference No.: A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9
Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany.
                                         ●


Subject to availability. Right of modification reserved.
Introduction and Important
                           Notes                              1

                           Installation
                                                              2
HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0
optiClient 130             First Steps and User
                           Configuration
                                                              3

                           optiClient phone User Interface
                                                              4
User Manual
                           optiClient office User Interface
                                                              5

                           optiClient easyCom User
                           Interface                          6

                           Using the optiClient phone
                                                              7

                           Using the optiClient office
                                                              8

                           Electronic Telephone Directory
                                                              9
A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9
                           Call List Management
                                                              10
Oc130 v4hp3000ug
opticl130v40IVZ.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                                                                            Contents




Contents                                                                                                                             0



short      MS-HTML help name E-Doku path V2.0(relative) E-Doku Pfad V3.0(relative)
name       e.g., eshb_hlp.chm z.B.: ../../../../bk1/01/bh/01 e.g.: ../bk1
e.g., eshb
easyCom easyCom_EN.chm                              ../11                                    ../12optiClient130easyCom


1 Introduction and Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 1-2
1.1 Hardware and Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     1-3
1.2 Target Group and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                1-5
1.3 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .     1-6
  1.3.1 Safety information: Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             1-7
  1.3.2 Safety information: Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              1-7
  1.3.3 Safety information: Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            1-7
  1.3.4 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .      1-8
1.4 Data Protection and Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                1-9
2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Configuring/installing Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3 Configuring Location Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4 optiClient Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
3 First Steps and User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Working with the Administration Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
  3.2.1 Configuring PC settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
  3.2.2 Configuring Setup information (License information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
  3.2.3 Configuring Parameters for PC Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
  3.2.4 Configuring Parameters for Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.3 Starting the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
  3.4.1 Logging on with a new telephone number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
  3.4.2 Extended Options parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
    3.4.2.1 General parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
    3.4.2.2 Audio parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
    3.4.2.3 Telephone Directory parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
    3.4.2.4 Update parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
    3.4.2.5 Server parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.5 Changing the User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                                                  0-1
opticl130v40IVZ.fm

Contents                                                                                          Nur für den internen Gebrauch




3.6 Exiting optiClient phone / office / easyCom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
4 optiClient phone User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Layout of the optiClient phone User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 General Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
  4.2.1 Using the PC keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
  4.2.2 Setting the speaker and microphone volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
  4.2.3 Special Tone Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
  4.2.4 Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
  4.2.5 Telephone Directory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
  4.2.6 Call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
  4.2.7 Key Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
  4.2.8 Key Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
  4.2.9 Accepting / Terminating a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3 Information on the optiClient phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.4 Manual Update Check for the optiClient phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.5 Option Settings for the optiClient phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
  4.5.1 General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
  4.5.2 Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
  4.5.3 Telephone Directory Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
    4.5.3.1 Telephone Directory Options - LDAP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
  4.5.4 Telephony Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.6 View Settings for the optiClient phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.7 Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
5 optiClient office User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Layout of the optiClient office User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 General Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
  5.2.1 Opening and Closing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
  5.2.2 Minimizing optiClient office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
  5.2.3 Changing your Code Key (PIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
  5.2.4 Setting the speaker and microphone volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
  5.2.5 Special Tone Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
  5.2.6 Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
  5.2.7 Telephone Directory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
  5.2.8 Call List Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
  5.2.9 Programming the Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3 Information on the optiClient office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4 Manual Update Check for optiClient office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.5 Option Settings for the optiClient office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
  5.5.1 General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
  5.5.2 Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
  5.5.3 Telephone directory options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
    5.5.3.1 Telephone directory options - LDAP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
  5.5.4 Telephony Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

                                                                                        A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
0-2                                                                                         optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
opticl130v40IVZ.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                                                                             Contents



  5.5.5 Speed-dial Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         5-20
5.6 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   5-23
5.7 Connection Parties Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .              5-26
  5.7.1 Call status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .         5-28
5.8 Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .   5-28
6 optiClient easyCom User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
7 Using the optiClient phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             7-1
7.1 Extended Dialing Functions Using Drag & Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                         7-1
7.2 Basic and advanced functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             7-2
7.3 Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                              7-3
8 Using the optiClient office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Making and Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
  8.1.1 Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
  8.1.2 Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
  8.1.3 Do Not Disturb Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
  8.1.4 Ringer Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
  8.1.5 Microphone on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2 Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
  8.2.1 Caller ID Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
  8.2.2 Initiating Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
  8.2.3 Extended Dialing Functions per Drag & Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
  8.2.4 Terminating Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8.3 Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
  8.3.1 Consultation Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
  8.3.2 Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
  8.3.3 Toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
  8.3.4 Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
  8.3.5 Parking Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4 Making Calls to Stored Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
  8.4.1 Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
  8.4.2 Call Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.5 If You Cannot Reach a Destination... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
  8.5.1 Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
  8.5.2 Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.6 Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
  8.6.1 Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
  8.6.2 Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8.7 Using Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
  8.7.1 Displaying Call Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
  8.7.2 Telephone Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
  8.7.3 Infos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
  8.7.4 Answer Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
  8.7.5 Telephone Data Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                                                  0-3
opticl130v40IVZ.fm

Contents                                                                                              Nur für den internen Gebrauch




  8.7.6 DTMF Suffix Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             8-24
  8.7.7 Hunting Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           8-25
  8.7.8 Resetting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             8-26
8.8 ACD Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .           8-27
  8.8.1 ACD Logon (Logging on to System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          8-28
  8.8.2 ACD Logoff (Logging off from the System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                            8-29
  8.8.3 ACD Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                 8-30
  8.8.4 ACD Unavailability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .            8-31
  8.8.5 Displaying the Number of Waiting Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                          8-32
  8.8.6 ACD Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .             8-32
9 Electronic Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    9-1
9.1 General Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .          9-3
  9.1.1 Selecting the Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                     9-3
  9.1.2 Viewing Options of the Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                            9-4
  9.1.3 Edit entries in the directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .               9-5
  9.1.4 Finding a Contact in the Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                            9-8
  9.1.5 Calling a Contact from the Telephone Directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                             9-9
  9.1.6 Sending an E-mail to a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .                    9-9
10 Call List Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1




                                                                                            A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
0-4                                                                                             optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
1einl.fm

Introduction and Important Notes                                      Nur für den internen Gebrauch




1             Introduction and Important Notes

           This documentation describes the installation, user configuration and use of the
 >         optiClient 130 V4.0. In order to make this documentation easier to read, the terms
           optiClient 130 (for the overall product) and optiClient phone or optiClient office
           as well as optiClient easyCom are used for the respective user interfaces.

General Information
The optiClient 130 is a telephony application that can be run on a PC. It permits phone calls to
be conducted via a LAN (Voice over IP) in conjunction with the HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 commu-
nication system.
The HG 1500 board of the HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 enables the connection with optiClient 130
via a LAN connection. The maximum number of clients that can be connected are as follows:

HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 V3.0 or earlier                      V3.0 or later
●     Office Pro           A maximum of 3 HG1500           A maximum of 8 HG1500 boards
                           boards with 48 clients per      with 96 clients each for a maximum
                           HG1500                          of 500 clients
                           (of which 16 stations can es-   (outside the LAN, 16 stations can
                           tablish a connection simulta-   simultaneously set up a connection
                           neously)                        in each HG1500).
●     Office Com           A maximum of 2 HG1500           A maximum of 4 HG1500 boards
                           boards with 48 clients each     with 48 clients each
                           (of which 8 stations can es-    (outside the LAN, 8 stations can si-
                           tablish a connection simulta-   multaneously set up a connection in
                           neously)                        each HG1500).
●     Office Point         A maximum of 1 HG1500           A maximum of 2 HG1500 boards
                           board with 48 clients           with 48 clients each
                           (of which 8 stations can es-    (outside the LAN, 8 stations can si-
                           tablish a connection simulta-   multaneously set up a connection in
                           neously)                        each HG1500).




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
1-2                                                                optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
1einl.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                               Introduction and Important Notes
                                                          Hardware and Software Requirements


1.1           Hardware and Software Requirements

Hardware
●     Minimum processor and RAM requirements for optiClient 130 phone/office:

                         Windows 98SE Windows 2000              Windows XP
      Processor           Pentium II with   Pentium III with   Pentium III with
                            233 MHz           450 MHz            450 MHz
      RAM                 at least 64 MB    at least 128 MB    at least 256 MB
●     Minimum processor and RAM requirements for optiClient 130 easyCom:

                         Windows 98SE Windows 2000              Windows XP
      Processor           Pentium II with   Pentium III with   Pentium III with
                            450 MHz           450 MHz            450 MHz
      RAM                at least 128 MB    at least 256 MB    at least 256 MB



       >
               These specifications are minimum requirements. optiClient 130 is an application
               that transfers incoming and outgoing voice packets in real time. This means that
               the PC being used must have enough CPU capacity and system resources avail-
               able for optiClient 130 and other applications. If other applications overload the
               CPU at the same time, voice quality may suffer as a result.



       >
               Please consult the Readme file on the system CD for further information on
               optiClient 130.

●     150 MB free hard disk space
●     CD-ROM drive
●     Ethernet adapter (for QoS functionality with 802.1p support)
●     Full-duplex sound card or optiPoint handset
●     In addition, when using a sound card :
      – Microphone and speaker (possibly also handset or headset)
          or
      – a multimedia keyboard with or without a hookswitch. The hookswitch will only work un-
          der Windows 2000.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                              1-3
1einl.fm

Introduction and Important Notes                                        Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Hardware and Software Requirements


Software
●     Operating system Windows 98 SE, Windows 2000 (SP2) or Windows XP
●     The installation software for the optiClient 130 on the system CD offers you the following
      two user interfaces, depending on the HiPath system connected:
      –    optiClient 130 phone:
           An optPoint-based user interface called the
           “optiClient phone User Interface” in the following documentation.
      –    optiClient 130 office:
           a system bar-based user interface called the
           “optiClient office User Interface“ in the following documentation.
      –    optiClient 130 easyCom
           a system bar-based user interface called the
           “optiClient easyCom User Interface“ in the following documentation.




                                                                 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
1-4                                                                  optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
1einl.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                              Introduction and Important Notes
                                                               Target Group and Requirements


1.2           Target Group and Requirements
The Installation chapter supports service technicians on installation and startup.
All other chapters provide an overview of the product and serve as a reference to assist the
user in getting started.

Prerequisites
A basic knowledge of Windows and familiarity with Windows-specific terminology (e.g. "dialog
box", "context menu", etc.) are also required.

Reference Documentation
●     Operating Instructions for the optiPoint telephone
●     Service documentation HG1500

Notational Conventions and Symbols Used
This manual uses the following conventions:
Italics              The names of menus, dialog boxes, and icons and the names of referenced
                     manuals are printed in italics.
Courier font         Examples of screen messages and entries to be made in response to input
                     prompts or in initialization files are indicated using the Courier font.
Boldface             The names of folders, tabs, menu options, commands and buttons are
                     printed in boldface.
This manual uses the following symbols:

           “i” identifies useful information.
    >
           Safety Information
    7      Hazard information. See section Safety Information for details.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                          1-5
1einl.fm

Introduction and Important Notes                                                 Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Safety Information


1.3               Safety Information
Only service personnel and authorized specialists are permitted to work on the installation.
Observe the following information:
●      Read through all the information on the equipment carefully and follow all the safety guide-
       lines. Make sure that you also note down the emergency numbers.
●      Always contact your manager before starting any work where the necessary safety precau-
       tions do not appear to be in place.

Types of safety information
This manual uses three types of safety information:

              Danger
     7        Danger symbols call attention to a situation that could cause serious injury or death
              to a person.

              Warning:
     7        Warning symbols call attention to a situation that could cause serious injury to a per-
              son.

              Caution
     7        Hazards that can cause damage to the hardware and software and even destroy it.


Further symbols for defining the source of danger in greater detail1:


       1               5                3            0               6              4              2
    Electricity      Weight:            Heat          Fire       Chemicals          ESD*           Laser
* Electrostatically sensitive devices




    1. These symbols are normally not used in the manual. They only explain the symbols that may appear on the
       systems.

                                                                         A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
1-6                                                                          optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
1einl.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                  Introduction and Important Notes
                                                                               Safety Information


1.3.1         Safety information: Danger
●   If the power cable appears to be damaged, replace it immediately.
●   Only personnel with proper qualifications or authorized electricians should perform work
    on the low-voltage network (100 - 240 V AC).
●   During a thunderstorm, you should not connect or remove telephone lines and PC boards.
●   Expect to encounter leakage current from the telecommunications network.
    Disconnect all telecommunications cables from the system before unplugging the ground
    wire from the system.
●   Ensure that the installation is never left unsupervised whenever work is carried out on an
    open installation.


1.3.2         Safety information: Warning
●   There is the risk of an explosion if the lithium battery is not replaced correctly. The lithium
    battery must be replaced only by the same or equivalent types recommended by the deal-
    er. (Always dispose of lithium batteries properly.)
●   If there are any optical interfaces: possibility of laser radiation: do not look directly into the
    beam.


1.3.3         Safety information: Caution
●   Prior to startup, check the set nominal voltage of the installation (operating instructions and
    nameplate).
●   As long as the power supply is switched on, always observe the greatest caution when per-
    forming measurements on powered components and maintenance work on plug-in cards,
    PC boards and covers.
●   Disconnect all power plugs in the system when you need to turn off the system power sup-
    ply.
●   To protect electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD):
    –    Always wear the wristband in the prescribed manner before performing any work on
         PC boards and modules.
    –    Transport PC boards only in suitable protective packaging.
    –    Always place the PC boards on a grounded conducting base, and do not work on the
         PC boards anywhere else.
    –    Only use grounded soldering irons.


A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                  1-7
1einl.fm

Introduction and Important Notes                                         Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Safety Information


●     Install cables in such a way that they do not pose an accident risk (by people tripping over
      them) and also so that they are not damaged.


1.3.4         General Notes
●     If the installation is brought into the operating site from a cold environment, condensation
      may occur. Wait until the temperature of the installation has adjusted to the ambient tem-
      perature and make sure that the system is absolutely dry before you start it.
●     Before starting a wall assembly, check whether the load-bearing capacity of the wall is ad-
      equate, e.g., in the case of dry walls.
●     When maintenance work has been completed, always re-install all safety equipment in the
      right place. Also close all doors, covers, or the housing after completing test and mainte-
      nance work.
●     All cables and lines which leave a system cabinet must be shielded at least between the
      connection point in the cabinet and the point at which the cable leaves the cabinet.
      Use a clip and pressure screw to contact all shield fabric to the cabinet outlet. This also
      applies to permanently connected service equipment.
●     Connect all cables only to the specified connection points.
●     Do not install any external modems in the installation cabinets.




                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
1-8                                                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
1einl.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                Introduction and Important Notes
                                                               Data Protection and Data Security


1.4           Data Protection and Data Security
This system also processes and uses personal data for purposes such as call detail recording,
displays, and customer data acquisition.
In Germany, the processing and use of personal data are subject to various regulations, includ-
ing the regulations of the Federal Data Protection Law (Bundesdatenschutzgesetz = BDSG).
For other countries, please follow the appropriate national laws.
The aim of data protection is to protect the rights of individuals being affected by use of their
personal data.
In addition, the aim of data protection is to prevent the misuse of data when it is processed and
to ensure that one’s own interests and the interests of other parties which need to be protected
are not affected.
Members of Siemens and Siemens Rolm staff are required to observe business and data
secrecy as a result of the company’s work rules.
In order to ensure that the statutory requirements during service – whether during "on-site ser-
vice" or during "remote service" – are consistently met, you should always observe the following
rules. You will not only maintain the interests of your and our customers, you will also avoid per-
sonal consequences.
Conscious action helps maintain data protection and data security:
●     Ensure that only appropriately authorized persons have access to customer data.
●     Take full advantage of password assignment options; do not allow unauthorized persons
      to gain access to passwords by writing them down on a piece of paper or through other
      means.
●     Ensure that no unauthorized person is able to process (store, modify, transmit, disable, de-
      lete) or use customer data in any way.
●     Prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to data media, e. g., on backup disks
      or printed reports. This applies to service calls as well as to storage and transport.
●     Ensure that data media which are no longer required are completely destroyed. Ensure
      that no papers remain generally available.
Work together with your contacts at the customer’s company: This creates mutual con-
fidence and reduces your own workload.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                               1-9
1einl.fm

Introduction and Important Notes           Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Data Protection and Data Security




                                    A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
1-10                                    optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
2install.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                Installation




2            Installation
This section contains information on the following topics:
●   General Information
●   Configuring/installing Quality of Service
●   Configuring Location Information
●   optiClient Installation Procedure




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                     2-1
2install.fm

Installation                                                          Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Information


2.1             General Information

QoS (Quality of Service)
To guarantee optimum voice quality in the network, QoS service installation and configuration
must first be performed and checked in Windows (see Section Configuring/installing Quality of
Service).
Configuring location properties
Client PC location properties must be configured on the client PC to ensure smooth optiClient
operation (e.g. dial prefix; see section QoS RSVP service deactivation).

Internet Explorer
In order to run the optiClient 130 properly, you will need to have Internet Explorer 4.0.1 with
Service Pack 2 or a later version installed.

Installation Medium/License
A CD with the following code number label is supplied as the installation medium for optiClient
130:
●     HiPath 3000/5000
      optiClient 130 V4.0
      System CD
      P30370-P182-A1-*
●     HiPath 3000/5000
      optiClient 130 V4.0 Upgrade
      System CD
      P30370-P183-A1-*
The license number required for the installation is located on the reverse side of the CD case.

              Always keep the license number in a safe place! No replacement license numbers
    >         can be issued in the case of misplacement or loss.




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
2-2                                                                optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
2install.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                                     Installation
                                                                           General Information


Installation Components
The following components are installed during the optiClient 130 installation:
    –    optiClient 130 (application software)
    –    optiClient 130 V2 TAPI Service Provider
         Service Provider of the optiClient 130;
         bidirectional TAPI (also used by other applications)




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                           2-3
2install.fm

Installation                                                                Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Configuring/installing Quality of Service


2.2                Configuring/installing Quality of Service

General
optiClient 130 can use the Windows QoS packet scheduler (Quality of Service) for network traf-
fic control in order to optimize voice quality. This service gives telephony packages priority over
"normal" data packets. The following applies depending on the Windows variant installed on
the client PC:
●     Windows 2000 / XP:
      The QoS features required are supported by the operating system. The required configu-
      ration steps are described below.
●     under Windows 98SE:
      Only limited QoS features, if any, are supported. No further configuration steps are re-
      quired for activation.
If QoS is to be implemented, the service must be installed and configured on the client PC.
The following may occur when transferring data in IP networks:
●     Time problems as a result of large e-mail attachments and Web surfing
●     Network congestion as a result of multiple requests for the same Web page
●     Reduced voice quality as a result of:
      –       delays
      –       jitter
      –       packet loss
Quality of Service incorporates various methods to ensure the transfer of certain properties in
packet-oriented networks (IP).
It is therefore important to ensure a minimum bandwidth for the duration of the transfer for Voice
over IP, for example. The available bandwidth of a transmission path (a 64 Kbps ISDN B chan-
nel, for example) is divided up if several applications run simultaneously via IP. As a result, pa-
cket losses leading to poor voice quality may occur in the case of a voice connection.
In HiPath networks, various types of traffic are transported via a single IP infrastructure. Quality
of Service aims to meet data and voice traffic requirements.
A high priority must be assigned to voice traffic to prevent it from being suppressed by data traf-
fic. In addition, it must be specified that high-priority traffic is to be transferred before low-priority
traffic. These specifications are performed in Layer 2 and 3:
●     In Layer 2, the three bits are used in the 802.1p field (the part of the 802.1Q day).



                                                                     A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
2-4                                                                      optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
2install.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                                          Installation
                                                          Configuring/installing Quality of Service


●    In Layer 3, the six bits of the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) field are used in the Type of Ser-
     vice (ToS) byte of the IP header.
It is also important to ensure that there is sufficient bandwidth within the QoS class (Codepoint/
IEEE802.1p User Priority) used.

QoS activation for the optiClient
1.   QoS must only be activated in optiClient 130 V4.0 Administration for use under Windows
     2000 (see Section 3.2.3, “Configuring Parameters for PC Performance”).
2.   QoS must be provided on the relevant client PCs, i.e. installed and configured.
3.   An unused QoS service for network traffic management, must be deactivated on the client
     PCs.

To install and configure QoS on the client PC, proceed as follows:


           For optimum network traffic control, the optiClient client PC with the installed net-
    >      work adapter as well as all other relevant components (routers, switches, servers,
           etc.) must support QoS.

Step      Procedure
     1    Open the context menu for My Network Places on the desktop and select Properties.
     2    In the Network and Dial-up Connections dialog, open the context menu for Local
          Area Connection and select Properties.
          ●    If the QoS packet scheduler is not yet available, continue with Step 3 to install the
               QoS packet scheduler.
          ●    If the entry exists, ensure it is activated (check mark in the box) and continue with
               Step 4.
     3    The Local Area Connection Properties dialog appears.
          ●   If there is no QoS Packet Scheduler entry there, continue with Step 4 to install
              the QoS packet scheduler.
          ●   If the entry exists, ensure it is activated (check mark in the box) and continue with
              Step 6.
     4    Click Install.... Select Service in the Network Component Type dialog and click
          Add....




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                 2-5
2install.fm

Installation                                                              Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Configuring/installing Quality of Service


Step          Procedure
      5       In the Select Network Service dialog, click QoS Packet Scheduler and click OK.
              The service is installed. Upon completion of this task, you are returned to the prop-
              erties dialog (as in Step 3) in which the QoS Packet Scheduler entry is displayed
              and activated:
              Display




      6       Click the Configure button for network card connection configuration. The properties
              dialog for the installed network card appears. Click the Advanced Settings tab.




                                                                   A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
2-6                                                                    optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
2install.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                                     Installation
                                                     Configuring/installing Quality of Service


Step      Procedure
    7     Select Enable for the 802.1p Support property:
          Display




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                           2-7
2install.fm

Installation                                                           Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Configuring/installing Quality of Service


Step          Procedure
      8       Select Enable for Flow Control:
              Display




      9       ●   Click OK to confirm.
              ●   You return to the Local Area Connection Properties dialog as in Step 3, which
                  you can also exit by clicking OK.
              ●   Finally, close the Network and Dial-up Connections dialog.
              This completes the installation/configuration of QoS on the client PC.




                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
2-8                                                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
2install.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                                       Installation
                                                       Configuring/installing Quality of Service


QoS RSVP service deactivation
The service that manages the QoS RSVP (Resource Reservation Protocol) must now be de-
activated to ensure that the system runs correctly:

Step      Procedure
    1     Start the service administration tool in Windows 2000 by selecting Settings - Control
          Panel - Administrative Tools - Services.
          Display




    2     Open the context menu for the entry QoS RSVP and select Stop.
    3     Close the service administration tool.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             2-9
2install.fm

Installation                                                             Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Configuring Location Information


2.3               Configuring Location Information

General Information
In order to run the optiClient 130 correctly, all your personal location information must be en-
tered accurately. If these options are missing or have errors, you will not be able to correctly dial
any entries from the phone book or call lists.

Step          Procedure
    1         ●   Select Start - Settings - Control Panel - Phone and Modem Options:
              Display




                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
2-10                                                                  optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
2install.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                                     Installation
                                                              Configuring Location Information


Step      Procedure
    2     Enable the personal location entry and select Edit.
          ●  In the Location name field, enter the name of your location and, separated by a
             space, the extension number (667 in the example). This extension number helps
             to identify internal phone numbers in the telephone directory, for which only in-
             ternal connections can be made when called.
          ●  Enter your Area Code without the leading zero.
          ●  If a trunk access number was configured on the system, it must be entered in the
             outside line for local calls and outside line for long-distance calls fields.
          Display




    3     Click OK to confirm your selection. You return to the dialog as in Step 1, which you
          can also exit by clicking OK.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                           2-11
2install.fm

Installation                                                                Nur für den internen Gebrauch
optiClient Installation Procedure


2.4             optiClient Installation Procedure
You can install the latest version of the optiClient 130 using the convenient InstallShield instal-
lation program.

Step          Procedure
      1       Insert the installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. The installation program starts au-
              tomatically.
              If the inserted CD does not start automatically because of the settings in the control
              panel, start the installation program under <CD-ROM Drive>:setup.exe.
      2       A browser window appears. Select the optiClient 130 V4 installieren/Install opti-
              Client 130 V4 option.
              A Welcome dialog appears. Click Next > to confirm.
      3       If you accept the conditions of the displayed license agreement, click the corre-
              sponding option and continue with Next.
      4       You are then required to enter the user information (Name/Organization) and the
              License key. You find the license key on the back of your CD package.
              Activate the required option under This application is installed for.
              Then click Continue.
      5       Select the language(s) in which the application should be installed in the dialog that
              appears. The following languages are available:
              ●   English (will always be installed)
              ●   German
              ●   Dutch
              ●   Italian
              ●   Spanish
              ●   Portuguese
              ●   French
              Click Next > to confirm your selection.
      6       Select the type of setup for the installation:
              ●   For the complete installation, the optiClient is installed in the default installation
                  folder C:Program FilesSiemensoptiClient 130 V4.
              ●   For a custom installation, you can select a different installation folder. Ensure
                  that an "optiClient 130 V4" subfolder is always created in the selected folder.
                  Additional optiClient installation folders to which all the necessary files are co-
                  pied, are created in this folder.
      7       A dialog is displayed indicating that you are ready to install. Confirm by clicking In-
              stall. The progress of the installation is displayed in a progress bar.
      8       After the installation is finished, a corresponding message appears, which you can
              confirm by clicking Finish. You return to the Browser window (see step 2) which you
              can close by clicking Exit.


                                                                     A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
2-12                                                                     optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
2install.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                                        Installation
                                                               optiClient Installation Procedure


Shortcuts on the Desktop

One desktop icon each is created for optiClient phone, optiClient office, and optiClient easy-
Com.




If you do not want to keep the desktop shortcuts, you can remove them. The programs are still
available via the Start menu.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                           2-13
2install.fm

Installation                               Nur für den internen Gebrauch
optiClient Installation Procedure




                                    A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
2-14                                    optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
3benkonf.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                      First Steps and User Configuration




3             First Steps and User Configuration
This section contains the following information:
●   General
●   Working with the Administration Tool
●   Starting the Program
●   Logging on
●   Logging on with a new telephone number
●   Changing the User Password
●   Exiting optiClient phone / office / easyCom




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                 3-1
3benkonf.fm

First Steps and User Configuration                                     Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General


3.1            General

Profile File
The optiClient 130 works with a profile file, from which the phone number configuration para-
maters needed for proper functionality are read at login. If you log on with a phone number that
is not recognized by the profile file, you can configure the parameters required for it during the
login procedure. On completing the login procedure successfully, the specified information is
automatically entered in the profile file.

Default Settings in the Profile File
In addition to the individual phone number configuration parameters, you can define default pa-
rameters to be used when logging in with new phone numbers. The default parameters are con-
figured with the administration tool optiClient Admin and are also saved in the profile file. If no
default parameters are defined, you will need to configure the phone number’s parameters
when you log in with that number for the first time.

Central Access to the Profile File
The profile file is saved on the user’s local PC by default. It could, however, also be saved in a
directory that is accessable to all users. This would enable users to work from any workstation
with the same phone number parameters, which only need to be configured once. The config-
uration of the profile folder is also handled with the optiClient Admin administration tool.

PC Performance
As well as connection parameters and user parameters, various standard settings, for example,
for PC performance and Client PC QoS (Quality of Service) are performed. These settings will
be performed using the optiClient Admin tool, which is installed on the client PC.

License information
The current license number can be displayed in the optiClient Admin administration tool and
can be updated with a new license number if required.

Personal phone book
The database with the personal telephone directory of a phone number is saved on the user’s
local PC by default. This database could likewise be saved in a directory that is available to all
users, thus enabling them to access their personal phone books from any workstation. The con-
figuration of the database folder is also handled via the optiClient Admin administration tool.




                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
3-2                                                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
3benkonf.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                               First Steps and User Configuration
                                                             Working with the Administration Tool


3.2           Working with the Administration Tool
This section contains the following information:
●     Configuring PC settings
●     Configuring Setup information (License information)
●     Configuring Parameters for PC Performance
●     Configuring Parameters for Quality of Service

General
Starting the administration tool is only necessary when
●     PC settings, e.g.
      –   Default settings
      –   Profile file path
      –   Personal telephone directory path
●     Licence specifications
●     Parameters for PC performance
need to changed. The administration tool optiClient Admin is included in the optiClient 130 in-
stallation package.

Starting the administration tool:
Start the application optiClientAdmin.exe, which is located in the program directory of the
optiClient 130 (the default directory is
C:Program FilesSiemensoptiClient 130 V4Client).




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             3-3
3benkonf.fm

First Steps and User Configuration                                       Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Working with the Administration Tool


3.2.1          Configuring PC settings

To configure the parameters for the PC settings, proceed as follows:
1.    After starting the administration tool, select the PC settings tab.

Display




2.    The current folder where the ’local’ profile file is saved is displayed under Profile folder in
      the Path field. If the users always work at the same workstation, then it is not necessary to
      change the default directory shown in the example. If the users use their phone number on
      a number of different workstations, a network directory that is accessible from all worksta-
      tions must be specified. The profile file is saved in the specified directory under the name
      profile.cfg.
3.    If users with new phone numbers should be able to change their phone number’s specified
      default settings individually, enable the option Allow individual setting changes on this
      PC with optiClient 130 V4. If this option is not enabled, the default settings for new phone
      numbers are used and cannot be changed by the user under the Option Settings.




                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
3-4                                                                   optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
3benkonf.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                              First Steps and User Configuration
                                                            Working with the Administration Tool


4.   To edit the default settings, click on Change default in the profile folder. This opens the
     Default values dialog box in which you can configure the following default parameters:
     –   General parameters (default)
         The parameters to be entered as default values here have the same significance as
         those under General parameters, which can be entered in the Advanced Options dia-
         log box (when logging in with a phone number).
     –   Telephone directory parameters (default)
         The parameters to be entered as default values here have the same significance as
         those under Telephone Directory parameters, which can be entered in the Advanced
         Options dialog box (when logging in with a phone number).
     –   Update parameters (default)
         The parameters to be entered as default values here have the same significance as
         those under Update parameters, which can be entered in the Advanced Options dialog
         box (when logging in with a phone number).
     –   Server parameters (default)
         The parameters to be entered as default values here have the same significance as
         those under Server parameters, which can be entered in the Advanced Options dialog
         box (when logging in with a phone number).
5.   Under Database folder in the Path field, enter the folder in which the personal phone book
     is to be created. If the users use their phone number on a number of different workstations,
     a directory that is accessible by all workstations must be specified here. In this directory,
     the personal phone book is created under the name TelBookxxxx.mdb, where xxxx is
     the phone number.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                              3-5
3benkonf.fm

First Steps and User Configuration                                       Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Working with the Administration Tool


3.2.2          Configuring Setup information (License information)

To configure Setup information, proceed as follows:
1.    If the license must be changed after installation, activate the Setup information tab in the
      administration tool.
Display




2.    The current License key is read out and displayed from the Windows registry. If a new li-
      cense is to be entered, enter this in the input field. Click Save to store the new license key
      immediately and directly in the Windows registry. You do not have to exit the dialog to do
      this. Click Reload to read the license key stored in the Windows registry and to display it
      in the input field.
3.    Click OK or Cancel to exit the administration tool.

                The Save button must always be activated in the dialog to save a new license
       >        key.



                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
3-6                                                                   optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
3benkonf.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                               First Steps and User Configuration
                                                             Working with the Administration Tool


3.2.3         Configuring Parameters for PC Performance

To configure PC parameters, proceed as follows:
1.   Activate the PC Performance tab in the administration tool:
Display




2.   The entries under Global settings for logged on user are global Windows settings which
     are valid for users logged on system-wide, i.e. outside optiClient 130 V4.0.
     ●    Specify the Menu show delay in milliseconds. The default value is 400 ms.
     ●    In the timer field below, enter the wait time (in seconds) which should elapse after the
          last user input before an application controlled in the foreground is actually brought to
          the top. This standard Windows timer is generally only used for applications that do not
          by default allow the foreground windows of other applications to run at the same time.
          The standard value is 200 s.
     ●    Click Save to store your input immediately and directly in the Windows registry.
     ●    Click Defaults to display Windows default settings. The values are displayed in the in-
          put fields.


A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                               3-7
3benkonf.fm

First Steps and User Configuration                                   Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Working with the Administration Tool


3.    Click OK or Cancel to exit the administration tool.

           Press Save each time to store your input in the dialog.
 >




                                                              A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
3-8                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
3benkonf.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                            First Steps and User Configuration
                                                          Working with the Administration Tool


3.2.4         Configuring Parameters for Quality of Service
Proceed as follows to configure parameters for Quality of Service:
1.   Activate the Quality of Service tab in the Administration Tool.

Display




2.   Enter the global Windows settings for the current PC under Global settings for this PC.
●    Use the Enable QoS under Windows 2000 option to activate or deactivate the option to
     use Quality of Service (QoS) under Windows 2000. This option must be activated for opti-
     mized voice quality which is also primarily dependent on the infrastructure in the network
     (see also section Configuring/installing Quality of Service).
     This option is irrelevant for operation under Windows XP because QoS is always available
     under Windows XP.
●    Click Defaults to display the default values for HiPath networks. The values are displayed
     in the input fields.
●    Click Save to save your entries immediately and directly to the Windows registry.


A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            3-9
3benkonf.fm

First Steps and User Configuration                                      Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Working with the Administration Tool


     Layer 2: User Priority acc. to IEEE802.1p
         The values are entered in the three bits of the IEEE802.1p field for the "Call Signalling"
         and "Voice Payload" traffic types.
     Layer 3: Priority classes (Codepoint acc. to DiffServ)
         The values are entered in the six bits of the DiffServ Codepoint (DSCP) field in the
         Type of Service (TOS) byte for the "Call Signalling" and "Voice Payload" traffic types.
3.   Under Settings for optiClient 130, activate or deactivate if optiClient data is intended for
     the "Call Signalling" and "Voice Payload" traffic types on the respective layer (Mark Layer
     2 packages/Mark Layer 3 packages) with the values set above.
4.   Click OK to quit the Administration Tool.

               You must always activate the Save button to save your entries in the dialog.
       >




                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
3-10                                                                optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
3benkonf.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                               First Steps and User Configuration
                                                                           Starting the Program


3.3           Starting the Program

General
Following the installation, three versions of the optiClient 130 with three different user interfaces
are available. If you are logging on with a phone number for the first time, either the default set-
tings will be used (if configured), or you must supply the necessary information after the pro-
gram starts. In addition to these settings there are also additional workstation-specific settings,
which can be configured later (see section Option Settings for the optiClient phone or Option
Settings for the optiClient office).

Starting the Program
You can start the program by:
●     double-clicking one of the shortcuts on the desktop




●     selecting Start - Programs - optiClient 130 V4 - optiClient office or optiClient phone or op-
      tiClient easyCom




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                               3-11
3benkonf.fm

First Steps and User Configuration                                    Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Logging on


3.4           Logging on
On starting the program, the appropriate configuration data is loaded, and you are presented
with the logon dialog:




When logging on, enter the following data:

Parameter                   Meaning
Call number                 Client telephone number
Password                   Appropriate password
Language                    Select the language for the optiClient 130 user interface. Chose
                            from the languages installed.
Remote Access               This option must be activated when Remote Access.

           The telephone number and the Password are assigned by a systems engineer when
 >         configuring HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0.
           The Remote Access option must only be activated if optiClient is logged onto a
           HG1500.
>     Confirm your entries with OK.
      When the optiClient 130 is started for a phone number that is already known, the parame-
      ters saved for that phone number are read in from the profile file. When starting with a
      phone number that is unknown, either the default settings in the profile file are used (if
      available), or the settings must be configured immediately at logon by clicking on the Ad-
      vanced button (see also the section on Extended Options parameters for details).




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
3-12                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
3benkonf.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                             First Steps and User Configuration
                                                                                 Logging on


3.4.1         Logging on with a new telephone number
When a user logs on with a new phone number without existing default values for the first time,
the individual user and connection parameters for that number are not yet known. Consequent-
ly, after the logon, a corresponding message is displayed to indicate that the system settings
could not be found. You now have the following options:

Display




>   If the IP address of the system at which the phone number is configured is known, select
    the option HiPath HG 1500 IP Address and enter the IP address of the HG 1500 of that
    system in the input field.
>   If a profile file containing the required connection and user parameters already exists,
    select the option Configuration File and enter the full path name of that file directly in the
    input field or click the Browse button ( ... ) and specify the appropriate folder / file name.
>   Click OK to confirm your selection. The logon is executed, and a connection to the system
    is established.
Following a successful logon, the appropriate parameters for the phone number are copied to
the (locally) saved profile file.

           A sample configuration file can be found in the folder miscprofile on the Instal-
 >         lation CD.



3.4.2         Extended Options parameters
Instead of loading the user parameters when you log on (for the first time), they can also be
entered by clicking on Advanced in the logon dialog:


A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             3-13
3benkonf.fm

First Steps and User Configuration                                    Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Logging on


     –    General parameters
     –    Audio parameters
     –    Telephone Directory parameters
     –    Update parameters
     –    Server parameters


3.4.2.1        General parameters
1.   Select the General tab in the extended options dialog.
Display (example for optiClient office)




     Enter the following parameters:

       Parameters                Meaning
       Enable voice compres- These options reduce the data volume and thus the bandwidth
       sion during local opera- requirement on the line. They are automatically activated if the
       tion                     teleworking option was activated when logging on to the system.

       Suppress periodic con-
       trol message during lo-
       cal operation




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
3-14                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
3benkonf.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                            First Steps and User Configuration
                                                                                Logging on


     Support system feature If the parameter Support system feature "automatic line sei-
     "automatic line seizure" zure" was activated on the connected system, this parameter
                              must be activated in optiClient office. This causes optiClient of-
                              fice to behave as a normal telephone, i.e., the trunk access num-
                              ber must be dialed for external numbers, and internal stations
                              can be reached directly.
                              The behavior of the optiClient phone is analogous to that of the
                              system. The parameter Support system feature "automatic
                              line seizure" need not be explicitly selected in the optiClient
                              phone, since the optiClient phone behaves like an optiPoint ter-
                              minal, which means that no trunk access code must be dialed for
                              external numbers. Internal stations can be reached via the auto-
                              matically generated internal key.

               In addition to lowering data volumes/bandwidth requirement across the line, ac-
      >        tivated voice compression reduces voice transmission quality.
               This option must only be activated if optiClient is logged onto a HG1500.

               To check whether the network path and/or the communication server (HG1500)
      >        is available, optiClient sends a control message every minute to which the com-
               munication server must respond. If this response message fails to appear, op-
               tiClient displays an advisory message and the display information is deleted.
               Every five minutes, optiClient tries to determine whether the network path and/
               or communication server is available again by sending control messages. Once
               a response is received, the optiClient automatically logs on to the communicati-
               on server again.
2.   You can now configure further parameters or click OK. This returns you to the Logon
     dialog.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                           3-15
3benkonf.fm

First Steps and User Configuration                                    Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Logging on


3.4.2.2        Audio parameters
1.   Switch to the Audio tab in the extended options dialog.
Display




2.   Enter the following parameters:

       Parameters             Meaning
       Handset                Under Handset select the handset for the optiClient. All devices/
                              drivers installed are offered in the drop-down list.
       Mixer                  Components located on the PC/sound card for the Mixer.
                              If this designation is identical to the designation of the Audio
                              playback and Audio recording components, you must only carry
                              out the selection here. The designation will be automatically as-
                              signed to the other components.
                              If the names for Mixer, Audio playback, and Audio recording are
                              not identical, they must be selected individually. Please ensure
                              that components from the same sound card are selected.
       Audio playback         Components located on the PC/sound card for the Audio play-
                              back. Ensure you enter a component from the same sound card
                              in all three fields.
       Audio recording        Components located on the PC/sound card for recording. En-
                              sure you enter a component from the same sound card in all
                              three fields.




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
3-16                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
3benkonf.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                               First Steps and User Configuration
                                                                                   Logging on


     Parameters                 Meaning
     Play back sounds only If the option is activated, sounds are output only via the PC
     via PC speaker (not via speaker.
     sound card)             If this option is activated on a PC running under Windows 98SE,
                             sounds are not signalled by a modulated tone but, depending on
                             the operating system, by a default system beep.
     Play back sounds via       This option can only be activated if the option Play back sounds
     sound card and PC          via PC speaker is not activated.
     speaker                    When this option is activated, all sounds (e.g. alert characters for
                                inbound calls) are played back via the sound card and the PC
                                speaker. Tones, e.g. busy signals, are only played back via the
                                sound card.

               To ensure proper functionality, it is important to note that if you are using the op-
      >        tiPoint handset, you should select USB Audio Device as sound card compo-
               nents for Mixer, Audio playback, and Audio recording.

               Activating the options under Sounds is only useful if the PC has an internal
      >        speaker available.

3.   You can now configure further parameters or click on OK. This returns you to the Logon
     dialog.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                               3-17
3benkonf.fm

First Steps and User Configuration                                    Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Logging on


3.4.2.3       Telephone Directory parameters
1.   Switch to the Telephone directory tab in the extended options dialog.
Display




2.   The parameters correspond to those which can also be used when setting the options in
     the optiClient (see Option Settings for the optiClient phone and Option Settings for the op-
     tiClient office).
3.   You can now configure further parameters or click on OK. This returns you to the Logon
     dialog.




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
3-18                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
3benkonf.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                             First Steps and User Configuration
                                                                                 Logging on


3.4.2.4       Update parameters
1.   Switch to the Update tab in the extended options dialog.
Display




2.   You can activate the Update Server here and specify the folder in which software updates
     are made available under the field Server share name on which update versions are
     stored. Whenever optiClient is started, this folder will then be checked to determine wheth-
     er a new software update exists.
3.   If the parameter Search periodically for an updated version on the server is activated,
     the check for new software updates will also be performed when the system is running.
4.   You can now configure further parameters or click on OK. This returns you to the Logon
     dialog.

           The set Update folder corresponds to the setup folder on the Installation CD (and
 >         not the root folder on the CD).




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            3-19
3benkonf.fm

First Steps and User Configuration                                     Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Logging on


3.4.2.5       Server parameters
1.   Switch to the Server tab in the extended options dialog.
Display




2.   Enter the following parameters:

       Parameter              Meaning
       IP address             IP address of the HG1500 where the user number is configured.
3.   You can now configure further parameters or click on OK. This returns you to the Logon
     dialog.




                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
3-20                                                                optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
3benkonf.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                              First Steps and User Configuration
                                                                   Changing the User Password


3.5           Changing the User Password
Every HiPath 3000 user can change his/her login password for the optiClient as follows:
1.    Click on the menu key in optiClient phone or open the context menu in optiClient office.
2.    Then select Change password.
3.    Enter the old and the new password in the ensuing dialog. Enter the new password again
      to confirm it.
      If the old password is correct and the two new password entries are identical, the changes
      take effect immediately. In other words, if a client with the same extension were to log on
      from a teleworking station after the password has been changed, for example, the new
      password would apply.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            3-21
3benkonf.fm

First Steps and User Configuration                                   Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Exiting optiClient phone / office / easyCom


3.6           Exiting optiClient phone / office / easyCom
●     You can exit optiClient office by clicking on the menu bar and selecting the Exit command
      from the menu.
●     You can exit optiClient phone and optiClient easyCom as usual in Windows by clicking
      the Close button in the upper right corner of the user interface.
A note appears while the optiClient phone / office / easyCom is closing.




                                                              A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
3-22                                                              optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
4bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                 optiClient phone User Interface




4            optiClient phone User Interface
●   The optiClient phone user interface simulates the optiPoint advance plus phone and gen-
    erally functions in the same way as such a telephone. Consequently, only the PC-specific
    operations and features are described in this document.
This section contains the following information:
    –    Layout of the optiClient phone User Interface
    –    General Operation
    –    Information on the optiClient phone
    –    Manual Update Check for the optiClient phone
    –    Option Settings for the optiClient phone
    –    View Settings for the optiClient phone
    –    Online Help

          It is not possible to use different user interfaces simultaneously!
    >




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                         4-1
4bof.fm

optiClient phone User Interface                                        Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Layout of the optiClient phone User Interface


4.1          Layout of the optiClient phone User Interface

  Minimize optiClient phone window                                     optiClient phone
                                                                       Close window
  Display
                                                                       Key module
  Phone book key                                                       (De-)Activate

   Loudspeaker key                                                    Call list key
   Microphon key                                                      Menu key
   Headset key

  Fixed
  function keys

                                                                      Programmable
                                                                      function keys


  Keypad



  Confirm function

  Browse functions                                                Accept a call (Answer)
                                                                  Terminating Calls (Ending
                                                                  Calls)
Overview of the optiClient phone user interface elements:

Element                     Meaning
Minimize window             Minimize optiClient
Close window                Exit optiClient phone
Display                     When the system is idle, the date, time, and personal telephone
                            number are displayed. When functions are activated, function-
                            specific information is displayed here.
Activate/deactivate key     Open/close the configured key module, see Key Modules.
module
Speaker key                 Speaker volume control
Microphone key              Microphone volume control
Headset key                 Activate/deactivate the headset (if it is available).



                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
4-2                                                                optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
4bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                         optiClient phone User Interface
                                                          Layout of the optiClient phone User Interface


Element                            Meaning
Phone book key                     Opens the phone book manager, see Electronic Telephone Direc-
                                   tory.
Call list key                      Opens the call list manager, see Call List Management.
Menu key                           Opens the optiClient phone menu.
Function key 1                     Preset with "Service Menu"
Function key 2                     Preset with "Redial"
Function key 3                     Preset with "Microphone" or changes to "internal" in the case of
                                   automatic line seizure.
Function key 4                     Preset with "Speaker"

             The first time you log in with a new telephone number, the text of the function keys
    >        is preset and stored as it was set when the system was logged into. When logging
             in with the same telephone number and with other languages, text is not reloaded.
             Changes, for example, in text in a different language are then only manually possi-
             ble.
Elements of the user interface that are not covered here, e.g., digits or function keys, corre-
spond to those from the optiPoint and can be looked up in its operating instructions.

Minimizing / Restoring optiClient phone as an icon in the Taskbar
If you temporarily do not need the user interface of the optiClient phone, you can reduce the
program to an icon in the system tray of the taskbar (next to the time/date display):
●     You can minimize the optiClient phone by choosing the Minimize command from the sys-
      tem menu.




    optiClient phone in the system tray of the taskbar

To restore the optiClient phone user interface double-click the optiClient icon in the system tray
or its button on the taskbar.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                   4-3
4bof.fm

optiClient phone User Interface                                        Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Operation


4.2            General Operation

General Information
●     To press a button in the optiClient phone user interface, simply click the key with your
      mouse.
●     Generally, input is possible through the keys in the optiClient phone user interface and
      the PC keyboard.
●     The function of the Minimize and Close buttons in the upper section of the user interface
      correspond with the Windows standard.
●     You can move phone numbers from other applications to the display window of the optiCli-
      ent phone by using a drag and drop operation (see also Extended Dialing Functions Using
      Drag & Drop).
●     The optiClient phone user interface can be moved around the desktop like a normal win-
      dow.
This section contains the following information:
      –   Using the PC keyboard
      –   Setting the speaker and microphone volume
      –   Headset
      –   Telephone Directory Management
      –   Call lists
      –   Key Modules
      –   Key Captions
      –   Accepting / Terminating a Call




                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
4-4                                                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
4bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                optiClient phone User Interface
                                                                           General Operation


4.2.1         Using the PC keyboard
The following applies when using optiClient with the PC keyboard:

Procedure                                            Key/key combination
Accept call                                          s
End call (hang up)                                   _
Scroll functions                                     X or Z
Confirm function                                     =
Volume control                                       + or - on the dial pad
Dial directly from the clipboard; a dial prefix is not < + +
added to the clipboard contents.
Dial directly from the clipboard; the dial prefix set Ì + v
for the location is automatically inserted first (see
also Configuring Location Information).


4.2.2         Setting the speaker and microphone volume

Setting the speaker volume


Key       Procedure
          The speaker key is used for speaker volume control.
          You can change the speaker volume during an active call by clicking on the "+" or "-"
          symbol, respectively. The optiClient phone changes the volume accordingly and also
          shows the setting in the display.

Setting the microphone volume


Key       Procedure
          The speaker key is used for microphone volume control.
          You can change the microphone volume during an active call by clicking on the "+" or
          "-" symbol, respectively. The optiClient phone changes the volume accordingly and
          also shows the setting in the display.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            4-5
4bof.fm

optiClient phone User Interface                                      Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Operation


4.2.3        Special Tone Settings
Besides the speaker and microphone volumes, you can also change the "ring volume", "ring
tone" and the "attention ring volume". You can make these settings when you are not conduc-
ting a call.

Key                Procedure
                   Click on the "+" or "-" symbol of the speaker key.The following appears on
                   the display:
                   Telephone Settings
                   Ring volume?
                   You can use the arrow keys that appear in the display to scroll between the
                   tone settings for the ring volume, ring tone or the attention ring
                   volume. To confirm your selection, click the confirmation key (check mark)
                   in the display
                   You can then click on the "+" or "-" symbol of the speaker key again to
                   change the corresponding setting. The current setting is saved on clicking
                   the confirmation key.




4.2.4        Headset

Activating / Deactivating the headset


Key       Procedure
          Click on the headset key to activate/deactivate a headset. The headset key informs
          you whether the headset is active (connector closed) or inactive (connector open).




          If no headset has been configured for use with the optiClient, the headset key will
 >        not appear.




                                                              A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
4-6                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
4bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                 optiClient phone User Interface
                                                                            General Operation


4.2.5         Telephone Directory Management

Opening Telephone Directory Management


Key        Procedure
           To open telephone directory management, click on the Phone Book key.
           A detailed description of telephone directory management can be found in the sec-
           tion Electronic Telephone Directory.


4.2.6         Call lists

Opening Call List Management


Key        Procedure
           To open call list management, click on the Call List key.


The following call lists are managed by the optiClient:
●   Lost calls
●   Received calls
●   Extensions not reached
●   Extensions reached
●   Conducted calls
A detailed description of phone book management can be found in the Call List Management
section.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                          4-7
4bof.fm

optiClient phone User Interface                                     Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Operation


4.2.7         Key Modules
As with the optiphone, 1 to 4 key modules, each with 16 freely-programmable keys, can be add-
ed to the basic module of the optiClient phone.

●     To open the key module click on
      the Activate button:




●     To close the key module click on
      the Activate button again:




           The maximum number of key modules possible per user can be set up in the user
    >      configuration. HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3550 allow100 key modules per system; Hi-
           Path 3350 / HiPath 3250 / HiPath 3150 allow 30 key modules per system. The key
           modules of the optiClient phone are counted as key module extensions for the opti-
           Point.




                                                             A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
4-8                                                              optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
4bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                     optiClient phone User Interface
                                                                                General Operation


4.2.8          Key Captions
You can label the keys in the main module and in all key modules in any way you want:

Step       Procedure
    1      Double-click the caption field on the key.
           ●  In the dialog that appears, you will see the current caption for the key and a sec-
              ond field, in which you can enter the desired (new) caption.
    2      Click OK to confirm.

           ●    The key caption on the third preprogrammed function key is labelled Micro-
 >         ●
                phone on/off.
                If automatic line seizure is configured, the "Initiate Internal Call" function is pro-
                grammed on this key. In this case, you need to manually change the key caption
                to Internal Calls.
           ●    When programming keys that are initiated with *91 by default, the correspond-
                ing phone number / key function entry appears in a line of the display. You can
                apply the text in the display to the key caption. To do this, open the context menu
                for the key that you wish to add a caption to and select Captions from 1st dis-
                play line.
           ●    In the case of a phone number entry, only the phone number will be applied as
                a caption by default. If you wish to assign the displayed name as a caption in-
                stead of the phone number, hold down the < key during the operation.


4.2.9          Accepting / Terminating a Call

Key        Description

           To answer a call, click the Accept a call key or the s key on the PC keyboard.


           To terminate a call, click the End Call key or the _ key on the PC keyboard.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                  4-9
4bof.fm

optiClient phone User Interface                                     Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Information on the optiClient phone


4.3         Information on the optiClient phone
You can obtain further information regarding version, copyright, connected hardware, personal
phone number, etc. in the following manner:

Step      Procedure
      1             Click the menu key. The optiClient phone menu appears.


      2   Select Information...
          ●   The Info dialog appears:




                                                             A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
4-10                                                             optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
4bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                              optiClient phone User Interface
                                                 Manual Update Check for the optiClient phone


4.4            Manual Update Check for the optiClient phone
In addition to the automatic update function, which checks for new update versions of the op-
tiClient 130 about every 15 minutes, the optiClient 130 can also be updated manually.

Step       Procedure
      1                Click the menu key.


           ●    The optiClient phone menu appears.
      2    Select Update...
           ●   The optiClient 130 checks if a new version of the program is available on the
               update server for installation.
No new program version available...
      3    ●    If no new program version is available on the update server, a corresponding
                message appears. If no update server has been configured, an error message
                appears. The update server is set up in the user configuration.
New program version available...
      3    ●    If a new program version is available on the update server, the following dialog
                appears:




      4    Choose one of the available options:
           ●  On immediate installation, the optiClient is first closed, and the update version
              is then installed. The optiClient phone must then be restarted manually.
           ●  If you delay the update until the next logon, the periodic update will be deferred
              to the next time you log on and will no longer performed during the current ses-
              sion.
           ●  If you choose the final option, the update version will not be installed. The peri-
              odic update check, if configured, is deactivated.


A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            4-11
4bof.fm

optiClient phone User Interface                                        Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Manual Update Check for the optiClient phone


Step      Procedure
    5     If you select Cancel, the update version will not be installed. The current settings for
          periodic update checks remain unchanged.
          After setting up the desired options, confirm your selection with OK.

          Local administration rights are required for manual (or automatic) optiClient update.
 >




                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
4-12                                                                optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
4bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                optiClient phone User Interface
                                                        Option Settings for the optiClient phone


4.5            Option Settings for the optiClient phone

General Information
To ensure proper functionality of the optiClient 130, you need to configure various user-specific
parameters.

Step       Procedure
      1                Click the menu key.


           ●    The optiClient phone menu appears.
      2    Select Options...
           ●   The Options dialog appears.
You may configure the following parameters:
      –   General Options
      –   Display Options
      –   Telephone Directory Options
      –   Telephony Options




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            4-13
4bof.fm

optiClient phone User Interface                                    Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Option Settings for the optiClient phone


4.5.1        General Options
Set the maximum number of key modules possible for the current user in the General tab. Ac-
ceptable entries are from 0 to 4.
Display




          The maximum possible number of key modules depends on the connected
 >        HiPath system (see also section General Operation). If the logged-on user has al-
          ready opened the maximum number of key modules, they cannot activate any more;
          the key modules are inactive (gray) even if the individually-configured maximum
          number for the user has not yet been reached.

          After the number of user key modules has been reduced, the modules already used
 >        once can be completely removed only in HiPath 3000 Manager E.

The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog
click on OK.




                                                            A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
4-14                                                            optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
4bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                optiClient phone User Interface
                                                        Option Settings for the optiClient phone


4.5.2         Display Options
Under the Display mode tab you can activate/deactivate the following options:
Display




>   Phone always on top
    The optiClient phone user interface always remains in the foreground.
>   Move phone to top on incoming call
    If the user interface is not set up to always be on top (i.e. in the foreground), you can
    configure the user interface here to have it brought to the foreground on receiving incoming
    calls.

           The option to move the optiClient phone to the top under Windows 98SE / 2000 / XP
 >         depends on the currently running application, which may prevent this from occurring
           (see also information on setting PC parameters in the section Working with the Ad-
           ministration Tool).
>   Maximize phone on incoming call
    If this option is enabled, the user interface is restored from its minimised state on the
    taskbar and displayed in the foreground on receiving an incoming call.
>   Hide phone on minimized status
    The optiClient phone is always reduced to the system tray; it can also be reduced to the
    taskbar if the corresponding option is enabled.

           Key modules that are detached from the user interface are not minimized
 >
A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                4-15
4bof.fm

optiClient phone User Interface                                      Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Option Settings for the optiClient phone


>   Minimize phone after a period of time
    Activate this option if the user interface should be minimized after a specified amount of
    time. This should be entered as a number of minutes. Use the Hide phone on minimized
    status option to decide whether the user interface is to be minimised in the system tray or
    on the taskbar.
The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog
click on OK.




                                                              A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
4-16                                                              optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
4bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                optiClient phone User Interface
                                                        Option Settings for the optiClient phone


4.5.3         Telephone Directory Options
Under the Telephone directory tab you can edit the following parameters:
Display




>   If you are working with a telephone directory server (LDAP), activate this option. Then enter
    the IP address or Name of the LDAP server.
>   In order to access and display the desired LDAP entries in optiClient, a number of settings
    need to be made. To do this, click on LDAP extensions (see also the section on Telephone
    Directory Options - LDAP Settings).
    If no LDAP telephone directory server is available, users can only use their personal phone
    books.
>   The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the
    dialog, click on OK.


4.5.3.1       Telephone Directory Options - LDAP Settings
Apart from the name and IP address of the LDAP server, you will also need to configure some
parameters for Extended LDAP Settings if a central LDAP directory is to be used in the opti-
Client phone.
>   To configure these settings, select the Telephone dir. tab in the Options dialog (see also
    Option Settings for the optiClient phone) and then click on the LDAP extensions button.
    A dialog box to configure the LDAP settings appears.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            4-17
4bof.fm

optiClient phone User Interface                                        Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Option Settings for the optiClient phone


Display




    The complete LDAP directory is stored in a hierarchical structure. In some cases, only a
    subsection of this directory structure may be appropriate for individual users as the base
    directory name (Base DN) to be searched and displayed. In addition, you will also need to
    specify under which field names of the LDAP directory the details expected in the optiClient
    130 are stored on the LDAP server.
>   In the Base DN field you define a certain base directory name as the root LDAP directory
    of the optiClient, i.e., the starting point from which entries can be searched and dispolayed.
    This entry can be optionally made in two formats:
    –     <Level_desig.3>=<Name>, <Level_desig.2>=<Name>, <Level_desig.1>=<Name>
    –     or
          <Level_desig.1>=<Name>/<Level_desig.2>=<Name>/<Level_desig.3>=<Name>



                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
4-18                                                                optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
4bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                optiClient phone User Interface
                                                        Option Settings for the optiClient phone



               The examples below apply to an LDAP directory with the following elements:
     >              – Level designation 1: c (e.g., for "country")
                    – Name of an entry at this level: DE
                    – Level designation 2: o (e.g., for "organization“)
                    – Name of an entry at this level: SIEMENS
                    – Level designation 3: ou (e.g., for "organization unit“)
                    – Name of an entry at this level: ICN
               To define these details as the base directory name in optiClient, the following
               entries must be made in the Base DN field:
                    – ou=ICN, o=SIEMENS, c=DE
                    – or alternatively:
                        c=DE/o=SIEMENS/ou=ICN
    If no restricted base directory is specified for the search here, the entire LDAP directory is
    used as the the base directory.
>   In order to correctly map the LDAP entries in the optiClient, the field names of the LDAP
    directory to be displayed in the column information of the optiClient must be entered under
    LDAP field names. The Name and First name fields are mandatory and must be filled
    with corresponding field names in the LDAP directory.

               The level designations, the names of entries within the levels of an LDAP direc-
     >         tory, and the field names in the directory can be obtained from the administrator
               of the LDAP server / directory.
>   Click on OK to save your entries. This returns you to the Options dialog.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             4-19
4bof.fm

optiClient phone User Interface                                     Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Option Settings for the optiClient phone


4.5.4        Telephony Options
Under the Telephony tab you can edit the following parameters:
Display




>   If the phone numbers of incoming calls are to be transferred to an external application,
    activate the External Interface option and enter the directory / name of the external
    application. A typical example of this feature would be searching for customer data in a
    database.
The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog
click on OK.




                                                             A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
4-20                                                             optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
4bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                optiClient phone User Interface
                                                         View Settings for the optiClient phone


4.6            View Settings for the optiClient phone
You can choose one of the three available views for the optiClient phone as follows:

Step       Procedure
      1                Click the menu key.


           ●    The optiClient phone menu appears.
      2    Select View. You now have the following options:
           ●   Normal view:
               The user interface is fully displayed with the dial pad and the function keys.
           ●   Without dial pad
               The user interface is displayed with the function keys, but without the dial pad.
           ●   Without dial pad and function keys
               The user interface is displayed without the dial pad or the function keys.
           The view of the key modules remains unchanged, regardless of the settings select-
           ed here.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                           4-21
4bof.fm

optiClient phone User Interface                                          Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Online Help


4.7           Online Help
To start the online help for the optiClient phone, proceed as follows:

Step      Procedure
      1              Click the menu key.


          ●    The optiClient phone menu appears.
      2   Select Help. The online help is started.




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
4-22                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                   optiClient office User Interface
                                                     Layout of the optiClient office User Interface


5             optiClient office User Interface
The optiClient office graphical user interface (GUI) consists of a system bar with several
(tabbed) dialogs, from which certain functions can be chosen, options can be selected and the
status of current calls can be determined.


5.1           Layout of the optiClient office User Interface
The optiClient office user interface has the following layout:
                       Close optiClient office                      Close window
 Window bar
                       Minimize




       Telephone directory / Call list/      Dial Window         Connecting parties window
       Functions window




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                               5-1
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                          Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Layout of the optiClient office User Interface


Overview of the available Windows:


Window                            Description
Functions / Telephone direc-      ●   Functions:
tory / Caller- and call records       Settings for available phone number functions. The func-
                                      tions actually available will depend on the phone number
                                      configuration on the HiPath system and may differ from the
                                      range of functions depicted here.
                                  ●   Telephone directory:
                                      Managing the Telephone Directory (see also section Elec-
                                      tronic Telephone Directory).
                                  ●   Caller- and call records (see also section Call List Manage-
                                      ment) for:
                                      – Lost calls
                                      – Received calls
                                      – Extensions not reached
                                      – Extensions reached
                                      – Conducted calls
Speed-dialing keys                Configuration and display of freely-definable speed-dial keys
Connection parties                ●   Display of current calls and conversations
                                  ●   Function icon can be initiated via the various call functions.
                                  ●   Current client status display as well as input request and
                                      function display.
                                  ●   Activate/deactivate keys and the keys for speaker, micro-
                                      phone and headset (if available) volume control.
                                  ●   ACD status display




                                                                   A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-2                                                                    optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                 optiClient office User Interface
                                                                            General Operation


5.2           General Operation
●     The Office bar can be moved around the desktop along with any attached windows.
●     Open windows can be closed by clicking the Close Window button.
●     Open windows can be removed from the bar and individually moved and positioned on the
      desktop.
●     You can change the size of the individual windows.

               If you have inadvertently made a window too large or moved it to a position in
       >       which some parts of the window are no longer visible, you can make the window
               visible again by double-clicking in the title bar.
●     You can move phone numbers from other applications to the display window of the optiCli-
      ent office via a drag and drop operation (see also Extended Dialing Functions per Drag &
      Drop).
●     A maximum of 4 windows are available for Speed-dial keys / Dialing. One of these windows
      can be moved to the side of the desktop and then be positioned as a bar for speed dialing
      keys.
This section contains information on:
      –   Opening and Closing Windows
      –   Minimizing optiClient office
      –   Changing your Code Key (PIN)
      –   Setting the speaker and microphone volume
      –   Headset
      –   Telephone Directory Management
      –   Call List Management
      –   Programming the Function Keys




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            5-3
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                       Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Operation


5.2.1          Opening and Closing Windows

Step       Procedure
      1    Open the optiClient office context menu:




           ●   All available windows are listed in the upper panel of the optiClient office menu.
      2    By selecting / removing the check mark in front of an entry, you can open / close the
           corresponding window. In addition to the window for displaying connection parties
           and the window for functions, the telephone directory and caller- and call records,
           you can open a maximum of four windows for dialing and speed-dialing.
           The dial window can be positioned anywhere on the desktop, including outside the
           optiClient toolbar.




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-4                                                                optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                      optiClient office User Interface
                                                                                 General Operation


5.2.2               Minimizing optiClient office
If you temporarily do not need the user interface of the optiClient office, you can reduce the pro-
gram to an icon in the system tray of the taskbar (next to the time/date display):




    optiClient office in the status area of the taskbar


To minimize the optiClient user interface, proceed as follows:
●       Choose the command Minimize from the context menu or the system menu of the Office
        bar.
●       or select the menu item Minimize in the Office toolbar system menu.
●       or click on the reduce button in the title bar of the window Connection Parties.
To restore the optiClient office user interface, double-click the
optiClient office icon in the system tray or its icon on the taskbar.


5.2.3               Changing your Code Key (PIN)
You can change the code key for your phone number as follows:

Step            Procedure
        1       Open the optiClient office context menu:
        2       Select the command Change code key...
        3       A small display appears. To change your code, enter your old 5-digit code and click
                the Confirm key. When prompted, enter the new security code, click the Confirm key,
                and enter the code a second time for confirmation.
                The security code is changed, and the display window is closed.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                5-5
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                   Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Operation


5.2.4       Setting the speaker and microphone volume

Setting the speaker volume


Key             Procedure
                The speaker key in the Connection Parties window is used to control the
                volume of the speaker. To increase or decrease the volume, click on the the
                "+" or "-" symbol, respectively. optiClient changes the volume accordingly
                and also shows the setting in the display.

Setting the microphone volume


Key             Procedure
                The microphone key in the Connection Parties window is used to control the
                volume of the microphone. You can change the microphone volume during
                an active call by clicking on the "+" or "-" symbol, respectively. optiClient
                changes the volume accordingly and also shows the setting in the display.




                                                            A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-6                                                             optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                    optiClient office User Interface
                                                                               General Operation


5.2.5          Special Tone Settings
Besides the speaker and microphone volumes, you can also change the "ring volume", "ring
tone" and the "attention ring volume". You can make these settings when you are not conduct-
ing a call.

Key                Procedure
                   Click on the "+" or "-" symbol of the speaker key in the Connection Parties
                   window. The following appears on the display:
                   Telephone Settings
                   Ring volume?
>   You can use the arrow keys that appear in the display to scroll between the tone settings
    for the ring volume, ring tone or the attention ring volume. To confirm your
    selection, click the confirmation key (check mark) in the display.
>   You can then click on the "+" or "-" symbol of the speaker key again to change the
    corresponding setting. The current setting is saved on clicking the confirmation key.


5.2.6          Headset

Key                Description
                   To activate/deactivate a headset, click on the headset key in the Connection
                   Parties window. The headset key informs you whether the headset is active
                   (connector closed) or inactive (connector open).



           ●    The decision to make a call via the headset or handset can only be made in the
 >              idle state (i.e., before initiating the call), since the headset key can only be op-
                erated when no call is active.
           ●    If no headset has been configured for use with the optiClient, the headset key
                does not function.
           ●    When a headset is connected, the volume control does not control the speaker/
                microphone, but rather the headset volume.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                5-7
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                          Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Operation


5.2.7          Telephone Directory Management
To open Telephone Directory management, click on the Telephone directory tab in the Func-
tions/Telephone directory/Caller- and call records window.
You can find a detailed description of the optiClient phone book in section Electronic Telephone
Directory.


5.2.8          Call List Management
Call lists for the following types of calls are available for the optiClient 130
●     Lost calls
●     Received calls
●     Extensions not reached
●     Extensions reached
●     Calls made
To open Call List Management, click on the Caller- and call records tab in the Functions/
Telephone directory/Caller- and call records window.
A detailed description of the optiClient call list management can be found in section Call List
Management.




                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-8                                                                   optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                 optiClient office User Interface
                                                                            General Operation


5.2.9         Programming the Function Keys
The function keys B to L on the keyboard can be programmed with specific functions for
the optiClient. The A function key is programmed for Help, and cannot be changed.
To program the function keys, proceed as follows:

Step      Procedure
    1     Open the optiClient office context menu:
    2     Choose the command Program Function Keys...
          ●  The current function key assignments appear:




    3     To assign or change a function key, click on the desired function key in the window:




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                           5-9
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                      Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Operation


Step       Procedure
    4      Choose the desired function from the list box.
           You have a choice of the following functions:
           ●     Microphone off
           ●     Suppress caller ID
           ●     Night service
           ●     Do not disturb feature
           ●     Call waiting without tone
           ●     Hunting group
           ●     Do Not Disturb feature
           ●     Answer text
           ●     Call Forwarding
           ●     Code key
           ●     ACD Logon
           ●     ACD not available
           ●     ACD post-processing
           ●     ACD destination
           ●     Accept a parked call
           and the setting for no assignment
           ●     No function programmed
           You can find more information on these functions in section Using the optiClient of-
           fice.
    5      Press OK to confirm your selection. The function key will now initiate the selected
           function in the optiClient.




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-10                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                optiClient office User Interface
                                                           Information on the optiClient office


5.3           Information on the optiClient office
You can obtain further information regarding version, copyright, connected hardware, personal
phone number, etc., as follows:

Step       Procedure
      1    Open the optiClient office context menu:
      2    Select Information...
           ●   The Info dialog appears:




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                         5-11
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                        Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Manual Update Check for optiClient office


5.4            Manual Update Check for optiClient office
In addition to the automatic update function, which checks for new update versions of the opti-
Client about every 15 minutes, the optiClient 130 can also be updated manually.

Step       Procedure
      1    Open the optiClient office context menu:
      2    Select Update...
           ●   The optiClient 130 checks if a new version of the program is available on the
               update server for installation.
No new program version available...
      3    ●    If no new program version is available on the update server, a corresponding
                message appears. If no update server has been configured, an error message
                appears. The update server is set up in the user configuration.
New program version available...
      3    ●    If a new program version is available on the update server, the following dialog
                appears:




      4    Choose one of the available options:
           ●  On immediate installation, the optiClient is first closed, and the update version
              is then installed. The optiClient office must then be restarted manually.
           ●  If you delay the update until the next logon, the periodic update will be deferred
              to the next time you log on and will no longer performed during the current ses-
              sion.
           ●  If you choose the final option, the update version will not be installed. The peri-
              odic update check, if configured, is deactivated.
      5    If you select Cancel, the update version will not be installed. The current settings for
           periodic update checks remain unchanged.
           After setting up the desired options, confirm your selection with OK.

           Local administration rights are required for manual/automatic optiClient update.
 >
                                                                 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-12                                                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                 optiClient office User Interface
                                                         Option Settings for the optiClient office


5.5           Option Settings for the optiClient office

General Information
To ensure proper functionality of the optiClient 130, you need to configure various user-specific
parameters. Although the necessary parameters for connecting to the switch were defined the
first time the program was started, they can be edited here in addition to the general user pa-
rameters.
>     Open the optiClient office context menu and choose Options...
>     or Click on the Options icon in the launchpad.



You can set the following options:
      –   General Options
      –   Display Options
      –   Telephone directory options
      –   Telephone directory options - LDAP Settings




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            5-13
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                     Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Option Settings for the optiClient office


5.5.1        General Options
Under the General tab you can define the following options:
Display




●   Activate the corresponding option if you want the ACD status to be displayed in the Con-
    nection Parties window. The appropriate colors are then displayed, depending on the
    ACD status.
●   You can define the width of speed-dial keys in pixels in the Speed-dial keys window.
The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog
click on OK.




                                                              A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-14                                                              optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                 optiClient office User Interface
                                                         Option Settings for the optiClient office


5.5.2         Display Options
Under the Display mode tab you can activate/deactivate the following options:
Display




>   Phone always on top
    The optiClient phone user interface always remains in the foreground.
>   Move phone to top on incoming call
    If the user interface is not set up to always be on top (i.e. in the foreground), you can
    configure the user interface here to have it brought to the foreground on receiving incoming
    calls.

               The option to move the optiClient office to the top under Windows 98SE / 2000
     >         / XP depends on the currently running application, which may prevent this from
               occurring (see also information on setting PC parameters in the section Working
               with the Administration Tool).

>   Maximize phone on incoming call
    If this option is enabled, the user interface is restored from its minimised state on the
    taskbar and displayed in the foreground on receiving an incoming call.
>   Hide phone on minimized status
    The optiClient phone is always reduced to the system tray; it can also be reduced to the
    taskbar if the corresponding option is enabled.
>   Minimize phone after a period of time
    Activate this option if the user interface should be minimized after a specified amount of
    time. This should be entered as a number of minutes. Use the Hide phone on minimized
    status option to decide whether the user interface is to be minimised in the system tray or
    on the taskbar.
The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog
click on OK.

A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                5-15
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                      Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Option Settings for the optiClient office


5.5.3        Telephone directory options
Under the Telephone directory tab you can edit the following parameters:
Display




>   If you are working with a telephone directory server (LDAP), activate this option. Then enter
    the IP address or Name of the LDAP server.
>   In order to access and display the desired LDAP entries in optiClient, a number of settings
    need to be made. To do this, click on LDAP extensions (see also the section on Telephone
    directory options - LDAP Settings).
    If no LDAP telephone directory server is available, users can only use their personal phone
    books.
>   The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the
    dialog, click on OK.


5.5.3.1      Telephone directory options - LDAP Settings
Apart from the name and IP address of the LDAP server, you will also need to configure some
parameters for Extended LDAP Settings if a central LDAP directory is to be used in optiClient
office.
>   To configure these settings, select the Telephone dir. tab in the Options dialog (see also
    Option Settings for the optiClient office) and then click on the LDAP extensions button.
    A dialog box to configure the LDAP settings appears.




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-16                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                 optiClient office User Interface
                                                         Option Settings for the optiClient office


Display




    The complete LDAP directory is stored in a hierarchical structure. In some cases, only a
    subsection of this directory structure may be appropriate for individual users as the base
    directory name (Base DN) to be searched and displayed. In addition, you will also need to
    specify under which field names of the LDAP directory the details expected in the optiClient
    130 are stored on the LDAP server.
>   In the Base DN field you define a certain base directory name as the root LDAP directory
    of the optiClient, i.e., the starting point from which entries can be searched and dispolayed.
    This entry can be optionally made in two formats:
    –     <Level_desig.3>=<Name>, <Level_desig.2>=<Name>, <Level_desig.1>=<Name>
    or
    –     <Level_desig.1>=<Name>/<Level_desig.2>=<Name>/<Level_desig.3>=<Name>


A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             5-17
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                       Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Option Settings for the optiClient office



               The examples below apply to an LDAP directory with the following elements:
       >            – Level designation 1: c (e.g., for "country")
                    – Name of an entry at this level: DE
                    – Level designation 2: o (e.g., for "organization“)
                    – Name of an entry at this level: SIEMENS
                    – Level designation 3: ou (e.g., for "organization unit“)
                    – Name of an entry at this level: ICN
               To define these details as the base directory name in optiClient, the following en-
               tries must be made in the Base DN field:
                    – ou=ICN, o=SIEMENS, c=DE
                    – or alternatively:
                        c=DE/o=SIEMENS/ou=ICN
    If no restricted base directory is specified for the search here, the entire LDAP directory is
    used as the the base directory.
>   In order to correctly map the LDAP entries in the optiClient, the field names of the LDAP
    directory to be displayed in the column information of the optiClient must be entered under
    LDAP field names. The Name and First name fields are mandatory and must be filled
    with corresponding field names in the LDAP directory.

               The level designations, the names of entries within the levels of an LDAP direc-
       >       tory, and the field names in the directory can be obtained from the administrator
               of the LDAP server / directory.
>   Click on OK to save your entries. This returns you to the Options dialog.




                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-18                                                                optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                               optiClient office User Interface
                                                       Option Settings for the optiClient office


5.5.4         Telephony Options
Under the Telephony tab you can edit the following parameters:




>   If the phone numbers of incoming calls are to be transferred to an external application,
    activate the External Interface option and enter the directory / name of the external
    application. A typical example of this feature would be searching for customer data in a
    database.
The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog
click on OK.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                          5-19
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                          Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Option Settings for the optiClient office


5.5.5        Speed-dial Keys
You can call defined speed-dial numbers directly via speed-dial keys. The speed-dial keys are
located in the Speed-dial keys/Dial windows (max. four). Open the window in which you want
to configure the speed-dial keys, and select the Speed-dial keys tab. A maximum of 218
speed-dial keys can be configured for each user. A dial window can be deleted, moved or
docked from the optiClient office toolbar by dragging the mouse over the upper/lower/right/left
edge of the desktop.

View for dialing the speed-dial keys
The speed-dial keys can be displayed in the old view with the handset symbols or in the new
view with the heads/bright dots and arrows.
>   To select the desired view, open the context menu of the Dial window and select Layout
    V.4 for the speed dial icons of Version 4.0 or Layout V.2 for the speed dial icons of Version
    2.0.

Speed-dial Key Icons
For internal speed-dial numbers administered at the system at which the opticlient is logged on,
the current status of the corresponding speed-dial extensions is displayed with the handset
icon. There is no icon for speed-dial keys with external extensions:

Symbol    Symbol           Meaning
Version 2 Version 4
                           The party’s extension is idle.
                           (for internal speed-dial numbers only)
                           The party’s extension is busy.
                           (for internal speed-dial numbers only)

                           The party is receiving a call. (In this state, the call from another caller
                           can be answered.)
                           (for internal speed-dial numbers only)

Adding a New Speed-Dial Key

Step       Procedure
    1      Open the context menu of the Speed-dial keys window and select Add Entry...




                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-20                                                                  optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                optiClient office User Interface
                                                        Option Settings for the optiClient office


Step       Procedure
    2      In the following dialog, enter the key captions and the corresponding phone number
           (internal or external). Press the OK dialog key to confirm your selection.




    3      The speed-dial keys are displayed in the window.

Changing the Caption or Phone Number of a Speed-Dial Key

Step       Procedure
    1      Open the context menu of the speed-dial key that you wish to change, and select
           Change data....
    2      In the dialog that follows, change the caption or phone number (internal or external)
           and save your changes by clicking OK.

Deleting a Speed-Dial Key

Step       Procedure
    1      Open the context menu of the speed-dial key that you wish to change and select De-
           lete entered data.
    2      Confirm your selection by clicking OK. The speed-dial key is deleted, and you return
           to the Speed-dial key window.

           You can skip confirming your selection on deletion by holding down the < key
 >         while selecting the entry from the context menu.


Sorting Speed-dial Keys in the Speed-dial Key Window

Step       Procedure
    1      Open the context menu in the speed-dial keys window.

A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                           5-21
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                    Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Option Settings for the optiClient office


Step       Procedure
    2      You have the following options for sorting:
               – by name (speed-dialing key caption)
               – by the type of phone number (internal or external) stored on the speed-dial
                    key
           You can optionally sort in either
               – ascending or
               – descending
           order.
           Select the desired option by clicking on it; a check mark means the option has been
           selected.

Dialing via a Speed-Dial Key
●   Double-click on the speed-dial key or
●   Open the context menu of the desired speed-dial key and select Dial....




                                                             A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-22                                                             optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                 optiClient office User Interface
                                                                                    Functions


5.6           Functions

General Information
As a user, a number of general and special telephony functions are available for your personal
phone number, which correspond with the configuration of the HiPath system.

General telephony functions
These functions can be activated in the Functions/Telephone directory/Call detail records
window.
Display




                                               Function options




                                               Function toolbar




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                         5-23
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                        Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Functions


The following options are available by selecting the corresponding check box.

Function                                                                                 Icon/
                                                                                         Option
●      Microphone off                                                                    Option
       (see section Microphone on/off)
●      Suppress caller ID                                                                Option
       (see Caller ID Suppression)
●      Do not disturb feature                                                            Option
       (see Ringer Off)
●      Call waiting without tone                                                         Option
       (see Call Waiting)
●      Hunting group                                                                     Option
       (see Hunting Group)
●      Do not disturb feature                                                            Option
       (see Do Not Disturb Feature)
●      Answer text                                                                       Option
       (see Answer Text)
●      Call forwarding                                                                   Option
       (see Call Forwarding)
●      Code key                                                                          Option
       (see Telephone Lock)
●      ACD logon                                                                         Option
       (see ACD Logon (Logging on to System))
●      ACD not available                                                                 Option
       (see ACD Unavailability)
●      ACD post-processing                                                               Option
       (see ACD Post-Processing)
●      ACD Night extension                                                               Option
       (see ACD Night Service)
●      Function keys...
       (see section Programming the Function Keys)
●      Reset functions
       (see section Resetting Functions)
●      Options and Settings
       (see section Option Settings for the optiClient office)




                                                                 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-24                                                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                  optiClient office User Interface
                                                                                     Functions



           The functions identified with "Option" depend on the feature set enabled for the indi-
 >         vidual users and may therefore not be available in some cases.


The following special telephone functions are available via the Connection Parties
Window:
See also Connection Parties Window.

Function                                                                               Icon
●    Accept a parked call...
     (see section Parking Calls)
●    Display received infos...
     (see section Infos). Only enabled if info was received
●    Send Info...
     (see section Infos)
●    Display sent messages...(see section Infos)
     Only enabled if messages have been sent
●    Callback orders...
     (see section Callback)
●    Telephone data service
     (see section Telephone Data Service)
●    Call and call list management
     (see section Call List Management)

●    Phone book management
     (see section Electronic Telephone Directory)

●    Call pickup group
     (see section Call Pickup). Only enabled on incoming calls to the pickup group
●    Help
     (see section Online Help)




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                              5-25
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                     Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Connection Parties Window


5.7              Connection Parties Window


                                                                      Open dial area
Display bar

Buttons for loudspeaker,                                              Display of the current
microphone, and headset.                                              call status of the tele-
Also used for browsing                                                phone number
and to confirm functions



Active bar
ACD status

                                                                      Function icon

                                                                      Display of connection
                                                                      charges

Available function
buttons

Function icons


Layout of the Connection Parties window

Element                      Meaning
Display line                 ●   In idle mode:
                                 Display of personal telephone number, date, and time.
                             ●   To activate functions:
                                 Display/query of function-specific information.
                             ●   Use as dial window.
Keys for speaker, micro-     ●   In normal mode:
phone, and headset as            For speaker and microphone volume control and to activate/
well as to scroll and con-       deactivate the configured headset.
firm functions.              ●   In operating mode:
                                 To scroll and confirm functions.
Active bar                   Displays the corresponding connection status of the connected
                             HiPath system as "active" or "inactive".
ACD status                   Current ACD status of the telephone number displayed with both
                             text and color.
Functions key(s)             The type, amount, and function are dependent on the status of the
                             current call.

                                                              A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-26                                                              optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
42bof.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                    optiClient office User Interface
                                                                      Connection Parties Window


Element                         Meaning
Function icons                  Start the respective functions
Dialing area                    The dialing area can be used here to open the dialing functions.
Call status display             As in the example: a current call (orange) with a called party
Function icon                   To quickly display an incoming call (answer) and end a call (hang
                                up).
Call costs displayed            Only for external calls

Dialing functions
Click on the arrow on the list in the Connection Parties window display:
●   Enter the phone number or select one from the recently dialed number list.
●   To call the party, double click the phone number entry. To access the party directly, click the
    direct access function key.
The call status is displayed on the call status display.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                 5-27
42bof.fm

optiClient office User Interface                                          Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Online Help


5.7.1        Call status display
The call status of an incoming, outgoing or active call is displayed in the connection window via
entries of various colors:

Call status display /                       Meaning
function icon
                                            Outgoing call (green)


                                            Incoming call (red/orange)




                                            Active call (orange)


                                            Active conference call (orange)
                                            (example: personal phone number
                                            plus two additional parties)
                                            Call on hold (grey)


Functions in the connection status window
The available telephone functions and their use in optiClient office (accepting calls, placing
calls, conferencing, etc.) is described in the section Using the optiClient office.


5.8          Online Help
To start the online help for the optiClient office, proceed as follows:

Step       Procedure
      1    Open the optiClient office context menu.
      2    Select Help. The online help is started.




                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
5-28                                                                  optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
BofEasyCom.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                               optiClient easyCom User Interface




6             optiClient easyCom User Interface
General
The optiClient easyCom user interface basically offers the same functionality as the optiClient
office and optiClient phone user interfaces.
It is not possible to use different user interfaces simulteanously.

For information to the following topics please refer to:
●   User Interface Design
●   Presentation Conventions
●   Screen Style
●   Call Field
●   Keypad Field
●   Journal
●   Send Digits and Privacy Buttons
See also:
Personal Preferences




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                           6-1
BofEasyCom.fm

optiClient easyCom User Interface          Nur für den internen Gebrauch




                                    A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
6-2                                     optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
5phone.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                    Using the optiClient phone
                                                Extended Dialing Functions Using Drag & Drop


7            Using the optiClient phone

7.1          Extended Dialing Functions Using Drag & Drop
In addition to the possibilities for calling a number that have already been covered in this man-
ual, you can insert a phone number from another application (e.g., a customer management
application) into the optiClient phone display via a simple Drag & Drop operation. The phone
number is called automatically.
If the HiPath system is not configured to allow an automatic dial prefix, hold down the Ìkey
while performing the drag and drop operation. On dialling the phone number, the prefix needed
to access an outside line for your location is then automatically read from the Windows Control
Panel (Telephone and Modem Options) (cf. section Configuring Location Information).




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             7-1
5phone.fm

Using the optiClient phone                                                Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Basic and advanced functions


7.2             Basic and advanced functions
For details on the basic and advanced functions identified with “*” below, please refer to the Op-
erating Instructions of the optiset E or to section Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alpha-
betical Order), since these functions are the same as for the optiPoint.

1.     Making and Answering Calls                6.     Call Forwarding
     * Answering Calls                                * Call Forwarding
     * Call Pickup                                    * Night Service
     * Do Not Disturb                            7.     Using Other Functions
     * Ringer Off                                     * Call Charge Display
     * Mute/Mute off                                  * Busy Signaling for Speed-dial Keys
2.     Making calls                                   * Code key
     * Caller-ID Suppression                          * Infos
       (extension suppression)
     * Initiate Call                                  * Answer text
     * Ending Calls                                   * Telephone Data Service
3.     Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneous-         * DTMF Transmission
       ly                                               (Changing over to DTMF Tone Dialing)
     * Consultation hold                              * Hunting groups
     * Conference                                     * Resetting Functions
     * Toggle                                    8.     ACD Functions
     * Call Transfer                                  * ACD Logon
     * Hold                                           * ACD Post-Processing
     * Parking Calls                                  * ACD Unavailability
4.     Making Calls to Stored Destinations            * ACD Night Service
     * Redial                                    9.     Telephone directory (see Electronic
                                                        Telephone Directory)
     * Caller List                               10. Call Lists (see Call List Management)
       Executive/Secretary Functions
5.     If You Cannot Reach a Destination...
     * Callback
     * Call Waiting




                                                                   A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
7-2                                                                    optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
5phone.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                    Using the optiClient phone
                                      Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order)


7.3           Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order)
The table below lists all available functions as they appear on the display. Functions that have
been configured (contact System Support) can be activated interactively (select + save) via the
Service menu (select + save or enter a code) or via function keys.
Functions                                     ... Interac- ... Via the Program/         ... With
(display)                                         tively       Service menu            function
                                                              Program/Service             keys
                                                                                Code
Account code                                                                     *60      X
Advisory msg. on                                                                 *69      X
Advisory msg. off                                                                #69      X
Associated dial                                                                  *67      X
Associated serv.                                                                 *83      X
Call waiting                                                                     *55      X
Waiting tone off                                                                 *87      X
Waiting tone on                                                                  #87      X
Call wait.term.on                                                               *490      X
Call wait.trm.off                                                               #490      X
Caller List                                                                      #82      X
Save number                                                                      *82      X
Changeover on                                                                    *66      X
Changeover off                                                                   #66      X
Change PIN                                                                       *93
Conference                                                                        *3      X
Start conference
Adding a party to the conference
End conference                                                                   #3
View conf parties
Remove party
Drop last conf. party                                                           *491
(only for U.S. with Centrex functionality)
Consult
Return to held call                                                              *0
Quit and return                                                                  *0
Transfer/US:Accept call UK:Accept
Control Relay On                                                                *90       X
Control Relay Off                                                               #90       X
US:Directory UK:Phonebook                                                                 X
DISA
Internal DISA                                                                   *47       X
En-bloc sending
Dial

A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                              7-3
5phone.fm

Using the optiClient phone                                          Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order)


Functions                                  ... Interac- ... Via the Program/         ... With
(display)                                      tively       Service menu            function
                                                          Program/Service              keys
                                                                            Code
DND on                                                                       *97        X
DND off                                                                      #97        X
Door opener on                                                               *89        X
Door opener off                                                              #89        X
DTMF dialing                                                                 *53        X
Forwarding on                                                                 *1        X
1=all calls                                                                  *11        X
2=external calls only                                                        *12        X
3=internal calls only                                                        *13        X
Forwarding off                                                                #1        X
Trunk FWD on                                                                 *64        X
Trunk FWD out                                                                #64        X
Forward Line: On                                                            *501        X
Forward Line: Off                                                           #501        X
Headset
Answer call
HF answerback on                                                            *96         X
HF answerback off                                                           #96         X
Hotline
Join hunt group                                                              *85        X
Leave hunt group                                                             #85        X
Rejoin all groups                                                           *85*        X
Leave all groups                                                            #85#        X
Lock all phones                                                             *943        X
Monitoring                                                                  *944
Mute on                                                                      *52        X
Mute off                                                                     #52        X
Night answer on                                                              *44        X
Night answer off                                                             #44        X
Open door                                                                    *61        X
Override                                                                     *62        X
Page                                                                         *45        X
Answer page (not for U.S.)                                                   #45        X
Park a call                                                                  *56        X
Retrieve call                                                                #56
Phone Test                                                                  *940
Pickup - directed                                                            *59        X
Pickup - group                                                               *57        X
Accept call

                                                          A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
7-4                                                           optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
5phone.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                  Using the optiClient phone
                                    Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order)


Functions                                     ... Interac- ... Via the Program/        ... With
(display)                                         tively       Service menu           function
                                                             Program/Service             keys
                                                                               Code
Prog. feature key                                                               *91      X
Redial                                                                                   X
Reject call
Release                                                                                  X
Relocate station
log off                                                                    *9419
log on                                                                     #9419
Reserve trunk                                                                            X
Reset services                                                                  #0       X
Retrieve line                                                                   *63      X
Ring Transfer: On                                                              *502      X
Ring Transfer: Off                                                             #502      X
Ringer cutoff on                                                                *98      X
Ringer cutoff off                                                               #98      X
Ringing group on                                                                *81      X
Ringing group off                                                               #81      X
Room monitor                                                                    *88      X
Select language                                                                 *48
Send message                                                                    *68      X
View sent message                                                               #68      X
US: View messages UK: Display Messages                                          #68      X
Mailbox                                                                                  X
Shift Key                                                                                X
Show call charges (own telephone)                                              *65       X
View call charges (other party’s telephone)                                              X
Speaker call                                                                    *80      X
Suppress call ID                                                                *86      X
Restore caller ID                                                               #86      X
Tel. data service                                                               *42
Temporary MSN (not for U.S.)                                                    *41      X
Temporary Phone                                                                *508      X
Timed reminder on                                                               *46      X
Timed reminder off                                                              #46      X
Toggle/Connect                                                                   *2      X
Trace call                                                                      *84      X
Transfer
Trunk Flash                                                                    *51       X


A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             7-5
5phone.fm

Using the optiClient phone                                          Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order)


Functions                                  ... Interac- ... Via the Program/         ... With
(display)                                      tively       Service menu            function
                                                          Program/Service              keys
                                                                            Code
UCD
Log on                                                                      *401        X
Log off                                                                     #401        X
Available                                                                   *402        X
Not available                                                               #402        X
Work on                                                                     *403        X
Work off                                                                    #403        X
UCD night on                                                                *404        X
UCD night off                                                               #404        X
Calls in queue                                                              *405        X
US:Callback UK:Set Callback                                                  *58        X
View callbacks/Delete                                                        #58
Use speed-dialing                                                             *7        X
Change Speed-dial (station)                                                  *92        X




                                                          A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
7-6                                                           optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                        Using the optiClient office
                                                                     Making and Answering Calls


8             Using the optiClient office

8.1           Making and Answering Calls
The following features are available when making and answering calls:
>     Answering Calls
>     Call Pickup
>     Do Not Disturb Feature
>     Ringer Off
>     Microphone on/off


8.1.1         Answering Calls
The phone uses a specific ringer signal when it rings.

Step       Action/Effect
      1    The incoming call is displayed flashing red/orange under the phone number / name
           entry in the Connection Parties window.
      2    The following options are available for accepting a call:
               – Click on the flashing call-status display
               – Click on the arrow next to the call-status display
               – Click the Accept Call button
               – From the context menu, choose the Accept Call command.


8.1.2         Call Pickup

Directed call pickup (only possible with speed-dialing)


Step       Action/Effect
      1    If an internal number that you have stored stored on a speed dial key is called by a
           third party, you see the call icon on that speed dial key.
      2    For directed call pickup, click on the speed-dial key of the called party.

Call Pickup in a Call Pickup Group
You can pick up calls for telephones within a call pickup group from your telephone. This is also
possible during a call.

A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             8-1
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                               Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Making and Answering Calls



Step         Action/Effect
      1      A party within the pickup group receives a call.
                     The call pickup icon is activated (blue) in the Connection parties window.

      2      Click on the call pickup icon to pick up the call.

             You can pick up calls for all parties that are assigned to your call pickup group. Call
 >           pickup groups are defined by a service technician.



8.1.3           Do Not Disturb Feature
You can temporarily block incoming calls when required by your situation while still being able
to initiate calls. Callers hear a busy signal.

Activating do not disturb
>     To activate the Do not Disturb feature, enable the Functions tab in the Functions/
      Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Do Not Disturb check
      box. A check mark will appear.

Deactivating do not disturb
>     To deactivate the Do not Disturb feature, enable the Functions tab in the Functions/
      Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Do Not Disturb check
      box. The check mark is removed, and you can accept calls again.




                                                                   A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-2                                                                    optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                      Using the optiClient office
                                                                   Making and Answering Calls


8.1.4         Ringer Off
If you do not wish to be disturbed by calls, you can temporarily disable the ringer tone for in-
coming calls. All calls will be announced with a short beep and also displayed on the screen.

Activating ringer off
>   To activate the Ringer Off function, enable the Functions tab in the Functions/Telephone
    Directory/Call detail records window and click the Ringer Off check box. A check mark
    will appear.

Activating ringer on
>   To deactivate the Ringer Off function, enable the Functions tab in the Functions/
    Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Ringer Off check box. The
    check mark will disappear, and incoming calls are again announced with a ringing tone.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             8-3
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                            Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Making and Answering Calls


8.1.5            Microphone on/off
You have the option of activating or deactivating the handset microphone or speakerphone dur-
ing a call.

Turning on the Microphone (Mute off)
>     To turn on the microphone



      –      click the microphone icon in the Connection parties window. The microphone is en-
             abled and a green dot appears in the icon.
      or
      –      activate the Functions tab in the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail
             records window and click the Microphone off option field. A check mark is set.

Turning off the Microphone (Mute)
>     To turn off the microphone



      –      click the microphone icon in the Connection parties window. The microphone is en-
             abled and the green dot in the icon disappears.
      or
      –      activate the Functions tab in the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail
             records window and click the Microphone off option field. The check mark is remo-
             ved and caller ID is enabled.




                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-4                                                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                        Using the optiClient office
                                                                                   Making calls


8.2             Making calls

8.2.1           Caller ID Suppression
When you place an external call, you can prevent your internal phone number or name from
being displayed on the called party’s terminal. This feature remains activated until you deacti-
vate it.

           The caller ID suppression function must be activated in the HiPath system and en-
 >         abled by the network provider.


Activating caller ID suppression
>     To activate the caller ID suppression function, enable the Functions tab in the Functions/
      Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Suppress extension
      check box. A check mark will appear.

Deactivating caller ID suppression
>     To deactivate the caller ID suppression function, enable the Functions tab in the
      Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Suppress
      extension check box. The check mark will be removed, and caller ID is enabled.


8.2.2           Initiating Calls

Dialing a party
To call an internal party or a group of internal parties (hunting group), simply dial the appropri-
ate station number.

Step        Action/Effect
If a speed dial key has been defined for the party:
      1     > Click on the speed-dial key (on the name)
            or
            >    Select Dial from the context menu of the speed dial key.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                               8-5
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                              Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Making calls


Step         Action/Effect
Dialing from the Connection parties window (dial area):
      2      Enter the number you wish to call or select it from the list box.
             Display




      3                Click the Confirm button to confirm

Dialing from the Connection parties window (context menu):
      1      Open the context menu in the Connection Parties window and select Dial.
             >   Enter the desired Call number or select it from the list box.

             Display




             >   Click OK.
      2      If you want to access the party directly, enable the option Speaker call. Confirm your
             selection with OK.
Call signaling
      1      The outgoing call is flagged as outgoing with a green indicator in the Connection
             Parties window.
      2      As soon as the receiving party picks up, the active call is displayed in orange.




                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-6                                                                   optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                          Using the optiClient office
                                                                                     Making calls



           When calling external parties, it is often necessary - depending on the PBX config-
 >         uration - to dial a so-called dial prefix, e.g. "0“, before the actual number or to record
           this prefix when defining the speed-dial key.


8.2.3         Extended Dialing Functions per Drag & Drop
Apart from the described options for calling a number, you can also insert a phone number from
another application (e.g., a customer management application) into the optiClient office Dial
window via a simple Drag & Drop operation. The phone number is called automatically.
If the HiPath System is not configured to allow direct access to an external line, hold down the
Ì k ey while performing the drag and drop operation. On dialling the phone number, the
prefix needed to access an outside line for your location is then automatically read from the
Windows Control Panel (Telephone and Modem Options) (cf. Section 2.3, “Configuring Locati-
on Information”).




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                 8-7
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                              Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Making calls


8.2.4         Terminating Calls

The remote party ends the call
The active call displayed in the Connection Parties window disappears.

You end the call
You can end a call by one of the following methods:
>     Click the function icon "Handset on-hook“ (red handset) for the active (orange) call in the
      Connection Parties window.
>     Click on End call in the Connection Parties window.
>     Select End call from the context menu of the active call.
>     Press the _ key.
The active call displayed in the Connection Parties window disappears.




                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-8                                                                   optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                          Using the optiClient office
                                                             Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously


8.3           Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously

8.3.1         Consultation Hold
You are conducting a call and would like to consult a colleague without allowing the current par-
ty to listen in.
Initiating a Consultation Call

Step        Action/Effect
Variant 1
      1     From the context menu of the first party, click Consultation hold.
      2     The call is placed on hold, and the call status display turns grey.
      3     Dial the second party.
      4     The call status display of the second call appears green when dialing and changes
            to orange as soon as the called party answers (active call).
Variant 2
      1     You call a second party while still talking to the first.
      2     The call is automatically placed on hold, and the call status display turns grey.
      3     The second party is called simultaneously (outgoing call). The call status display
            switches to green when dialing and changes to orange as soon as the called party
            answers (active call).

Ending a consultation call

Step        Action/Effect
      1     You end the (active) consultation call.
      2     The party with which you conducted a consultation call is disconnected, and you are
            automatically returned to the call on hold, which now becomes the active call
            (orange).




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                8-9
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                               Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously


8.3.2          Conferencing
During an internal or external call, you can call up to four internal or external stations, add them
to the call, and thus conduct a conference call.
Initiating a Conference

Step         Action/Effect
     1       During a call, you initiate a consultation call with another party with whom you want
             to conduct a conference call.
     2       As soon as the called party accepts the call, the call status display turns orange.
     3       Select Start conference with from the context menu of the call on hold.
     4       As the first party in the conference, you (who were originally on hold) now conduct
             a conference call with the second party. Your two conversation partners are depicted
             as a conference call with an orange call-status display.

Expanding a Conference

Step         Action/Effect
     1       During a conference call, you initiate a consultation call with the next party in the
             conference.
     2       As soon as the called party accepts the call, the call status display turns orange.
     3       Select Start conference with from the context menu of the conference call.
     4       You, the previous conference parties, and the new party now conduct a conference
             call. All conversation partners are depicted as a conference call with an orangecall-
             status display.

Connecting Conference Parties

Step         Action/Effect
     1       During a conference call, select the entry Connect partner from the context menu
             of the conference call.
     2       You thus leave the conference, while the remaining parties stay connected. The call
             is removed from the display in the Connection Parties window.

End Conference

Step         Action/Effect
     1       During a conference call, select the entry End conference from the context menu
             of the conference call.

                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-10                                                                  optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                        Using the optiClient office
                                                           Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously


8.3.3          Toggle
You can toggle between two calls and alternately speak with both parties. The waiting party
cannot listen in on your conversation.
Both parties can be either external or internal parties.
You also have the option of disconnecting from both calls and connecting the two parties to one
another (Call Transfer). Alternatively, you can also initiate a conference (Conferencing).

Step       Action/Effect
    1      You are currently conducting a call.
    2      You now conduct a consultation call with another party.
    3      To switch between the two parties (active / held), you can:
           >    select Toggle from the context menu of the respective party on hold.
           >    click the Toggle button.
    4      The active call and thus the call-status display changes to reflect your choices.


8.3.4          Call Transfer
If the party you are currently speaking to would like to speak to another party, you can call that
party and transfer the call via a screened or unscreened transfer.

Step       Action/Effect
    1      During a call you conduct a consultation with the party to which you want to transfer
           the active call.
    2      Before or after the selected party responds, open the context menu in the call-status
           display of the consultation call and select Transfer call.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                               8-11
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                               Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously


8.3.5             Parking Calls
You can park up to ten calls, either internal, external, or both. Parked connections can be picked
up at other stations. This feature is useful if you want to continue a call at another phone.
Parking a Call

Step         Action/Effect
     1       During an active call, select Park call... from the context menu.
     2       Enter a free line number for the call in the dialog that follows and then click OK to
             confirm your selection:




             Line numbers 0 to 9 are available for this purpose.
     2       The call is parked.

Retrieving a Parked Call

Step         Action/Effect
     1               To retrieve a parked call, click on the Park icon in the toolbar of the Connec-
                     tion parties window
             or
             >     Open the context menu in the Connection Parties window and select Back
                   from park status.




                                                                   A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-12                                                                   optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                     Using the optiClient office
                                                        Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously


Step       Action/Effect
    2      Enter the line number on which the call is parked in the dialog that follows and then
           click OK to confirm your selection:




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            8-13
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                              Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Making Calls to Stored Destinations


8.4             Making Calls to Stored Destinations

8.4.1           Redial
The last ten phone numbers dialed are automatically saved in a single dialing list. To dial one
of these saved phone numbers, proceed as follows:

Step         Procedure
Redialing via the Dial area:
      1      Open the Dial area in the Connection Parties window, select the number
             you wish to call from the listbox, and click the icon of the Confirm
             button.
Redialing via the Connection Parties window:
      1      Open the context menu in the Connection Parties window and select Dial. Select
             the desired phone number from the list box and then click on OK.
Redialing the last number:
      1      Open the context menu in the Connection Parties window and select Redial.

             Instead of selecting the number to be redialed manually, you can also redial numbers
    >        from the caller and call records (e.g. parties not reached or busy) of the optiClient.



8.4.2           Call Lists
A convenient Call List function has been implemented in the optiClient office. The following calls
are automatically included in the Call List management:
●     Missed calls
●     Received calls
●     Extensions not reached
●     Extensions reached
●     Calls made
To open Call List management, click on the Caller- and call records tab in the Functions/
Telephone Directory/Call detail records window.
A detailed description of the optiClient call list management can be found in section Call List
Management.



                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-14                                                                  optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                        Using the optiClient office
                                                             If You Cannot Reach a Destination...


8.5           If You Cannot Reach a Destination...

8.5.1         Callback
If a user is busy or is not answering, you can store an automatic callback. This feature saves
you from having to make repeated attempts to reach the user. The system/party calls you
●     when both you and the busy station are free
●     or when the station that did not answer has conducted another call.
You can save up to five callback requests. Before your saved callback requests have been ex-
ecuted, you can display them and delete them as desired.
Callback calls are repeated until a connection is made or the callback call is canceled. A phone
or PC can initiate up to five callbacks and be the destination of up to five callback requests. Ad-
ditional callbacks are rejected.

           Depending on the dialed station, some callback requests may be rejected.
    >
Initiating Callback Orders
From the context menu, point to and then click Consultation hold.

Displaying/Deleting Callback Orders
You can display or delete your callback orders as follows:

Step       Action/Effect
      1             Click the Callback orders icon in the Connection parties window.

      2    The information in the display area (Connection Parties window) guides you
           through the process of viewing or deleting callback orders in the same manner as
           when using an optiPoint phone.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                              8-15
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                               Nur für den internen Gebrauch
If You Cannot Reach a Destination...


8.5.2            Call Waiting
Even when you are conducting a call, you can still be reached by other callers. During a call,
you are notified that another call is waiting both acoustically (alerting tone) and visually and can
answer this call.

Disabling the Call Waiting Tone
>    To deactivate the Call Waiting feature, click the Call waiting without tone check box in the
     Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. The
     check mark is set.

Enabling the Call Waiting Tone
>    To activate the call waiting tone, click the Call waiting without tone check box in the
     Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. The
     check mark is removed, and you can hear the tone again.

             ●    Automatic call waiting can be configured on the system level.
 >           ●

             ●
                  You can only be the recipient of such calls.
                  There is no way to actively get through to other busy stations (call waiting).




                                                                   A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-16                                                                   optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                         Using the optiClient office
                                                                                 Call Forwarding


8.6               Call Forwarding

8.6.1             Call Forwarding
You can forward internal and/or external calls to various internal or external telephones (desti-
nations). External destinations are also possible, depending on system configuration.
You have the option of forwarding
●     all calls
●     only external calls or
●     only internal calls.
Enabling Call Forwarding

Step         Action/Effect
      1      To turn on call forwarding, click the Call forwarding check box in the Functions tab
             of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window.
      2      In the dialog that follows, select the Call type for which the forwarding applies and
             enter a Call forwarding destination. Click OK to confirm your selection.




      3      Call forwarding is activated, a check mark is placed before the function option, and
             the activated call forwarding is displayed with the call forwarding target in the ACD
             status field of the Connection Parties window:



Disabling Call Forwarding
>     To disable the call forwarding function, click the Call forwarding check box in the
      Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. The
      check mark and the display in the Connection Parties window are removed, and call
      forwarding is disabled.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                              8-17
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                             Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Call Forwarding


8.6.2          Night Service
In night answer mode (for example, outside office hours), all external calls are immediately for-
warded to a specific internal telephone (night destination).

Activating Night Service


Step         Action/Effect
     1       To activate the Night Service function, click the Night service check box in the
             Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window.

Deactivating Night Service


Step         Action/Effect
     1       To disable the Night Service function, click the Night service check box in the Func-
             tions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. The
             check mark is removed, and the night service is disabled.




                                                                 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-18                                                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                     Using the optiClient office
                                                                      Using Other Functions


8.7           Using Other Functions

8.7.1         Displaying Call Charges
The connection charges for an external call are automatically shown in the call-status display
of the Connection Parties window.

           The display of call charge information depends on the network provider.
 >
8.7.2         Telephone Lock
You can protect your phone against unauthorized access (and protect your personal data) by
entering a 5-digit personal code.
Enabling a Phone Lock

Step       Action/Effect
      1    To enable the phone lock, click the Code key check box in the Functions tab of the
           Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window.
      2    A dialog to lock the phone appears:




      3    Enter the 5-digit code number and then click OK.
      4    A check mark is set in the function option.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                          8-19
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                            Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Using Other Functions


Disabling a Phone Lock

Step         Action/Effect
     1       To disable the phone lock, click the Code key check box in the Functions tab of the
             Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window.
     2       A dialog to release the lock appears.




     3       To release the lock, enter the code number and then click OK.
     4       The check mark n the function option is removed.

>    For more details on changing codes, see the section Telephone Lock.




                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-20                                                                optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                       Using the optiClient office
                                                                        Using Other Functions


8.7.3         Infos

Sending Infos


Step       Action/Effect
    1              Click the Send Info icon on the Functions tab in the Functions/Telephone
                   Directory/Call detail records window.


           or select the entry Send Info... from the context menu in the Connection Parties
           window.
    2      As with the optiPoint phone, you are now requested to enter the Call number of the
           recipient and to select the Info.




           Confirm your entries with OK. You will receive a confirmation when the Info is sent.

           In a calling state, messages are directly sent to the called parties. The call number
 >         is already filled in, and the corresponding field is greyed out.


Reading Infos


Step       Action/Effect
    1              As soon as you receive an info, the Read Infos sent icon turns blue (active)
                   on the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail
                   records window. Click this icon to view the message.
    2      The sent info appears in the display that follows.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            8-21
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                              Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Using Other Functions


Displaying Infos sent


Step         Action/Effect
     1              As soon as you receive an info, the Read Infos sent icon turns blue (active)
                    on the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail
                    records window. Click this icon to view the message.
     2       The sent info appears in the display that follows.




                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-22                                                                  optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                       Using the optiClient office
                                                                        Using Other Functions


8.7.4         Answer Text
If you have configured an answer text, the text you configured is automatically transmitted to an
internal caller.

Configuring Answer Text


Step       Action/Effect
    1      To select and activate an answer text, click the check box Answer text in the Func-
           tions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window.
    2      The dialog to select / edit the answer text appears:




    3      Select the desired answer text or edit the text by adding your own details and click
           OK to confirm your selection.
    4      A check mark is set in the function option.

Disabling an Answer Text

Step       Action/Effect
    1      To disable the set answer text, click the check box Answer text on the Functions
           tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window.
    2      The check mark disappears, and the answer text is no longer shown to callers.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             8-23
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                           Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Using Other Functions


8.7.5          Telephone Data Service
If you want to enter TDS codes that can be read and processed from other attached applica-
tions, proceed as follows:

Step         Action/Effect
     1             Click the "TDS" symbol in the Connection Parties window.

     2       You can then enter the TDS codes in the screen that follows.


8.7.6          DTMF Suffix Dialing
For special applications (for example, for data services), DTMF signals (DTMF tones) are re-
quired while conducting a call (tone dialing).

Enabling DTMF suffix dialing


Step         Action/Effect
     1       From the context menu in the Connection Parties window, select DTMF suffix-di-
             aling...
     2       A dialog in which you can enter the DTMF signals appears:




     3       Click OK to confirm your selection and send the DTMF signals.




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-24                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                        Using the optiClient office
                                                                         Using Other Functions


8.7.7         Hunting Group
A group of stations can be interconnected in a hunting group; this means that in addition to their
respective phone numbers, these stations also have a shared phone number for the hunting
group.
Incoming calls are signaled consecutively at all the extensions in the hunting group until one of
them answers the call. The caller always hears the ringing tone. The call is switched to the first
telephone that becomes available in the hunting group.
Each member of the group remains available under his or her own station number. All config-
ured functions such as call forwarding, for example, apply both to the individual phone number
and to the group member.
Hunting groups are configured by the service technician. If you want to register your extension
in the configured hunting group, proceed as follows:

Activating a Hunting Group


Step       Action/Effect
    1      Click the Hunting group check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Tele-
           phone Directory/Call detail records window.
    2      A check mark is set in the function option, and your extension is now added to the
           hunting group.

Deactivating a Hunting Group


Step       Action/Effect
    1      Click the Hunting group check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Tele-
           phone Directory/Call detail records window.
    2      The check mark is removed in the function option, and your extension is now re-
           moved from the hunting group.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             8-25
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                           Nur für den internen Gebrauch
Using Other Functions


8.7.8          Resetting Functions
There is a general reset procedure for activated functions. All enabled functions (such as ringer
cutoff, call forwarding and answer text) are reset (depending on the configuration of the tele-
phone system).

Step         Action/Effect
     1             Click the Reset functions icon in the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call
                   detail records window.
     2       The functions are reset in accordance with the settings on the phone system.




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-26                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                      Using the optiClient office
                                                                              ACD Functions


8.8            ACD Functions
The ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) feature serves to distribute calls within a team. An in-
coming call is always assigned to the team member (agent) who has had the longest break
without a call.
The team members can also work in different locations, e.g. at the company and on a home
workstation. The teams (call distribution groups) and team members (agents) are defined by
the service technician.
The current ACD status is displayed in the Connection Parties window in the form of a separate
button with different labels and colors, depending on the ACD status.

●     The station is not logged on (grey)
●     The station is logged on (bright green)
●     The station is in the wrap-up phase (dark green)
●     The station is not available (dark blue)
The code of the person responsible appears in parentheses after the text. Furthermore, the call
forwarding destination is indicated in text form on this button.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                           8-27
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                           Nur für den internen Gebrauch
ACD Functions


8.8.1             ACD Logon (Logging on to System)
At the start of service, you must log on to the system.

Step         Action/Effect
     1       To complete the ACD logon, click
             >     the ACD Logon check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone
                   Directory/Call detail records window
             or
             >     the entry Logon in the context menu of the Connection parties window.
     2       A dialog in which you can enter the code for the person responsible appears. Click
             OK to confirm your selection.




     3       The ACD status in the Connection Parties window changes to bright green (logged
             on).

             Your Processor ID for logging on to ACD is not the same as your phone number.
 >           It is configured and assigned to you by the service technician.




                                                               A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-28                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                     Using the optiClient office
                                                                             ACD Functions


8.8.2           ACD Logoff (Logging off from the System)
At the end of service, you must log off from the system.

Step       Action/Effect
    1      To complete the ACD logoff, click
           >     the ACD Logoff check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone
                 Directory/Call detail records window
           or
           >     the entry Logoff in the context menu of the Connection parties window.
    2      The logoff is performed; the check mark before the function option is removed, and
           the ACD status in the Connection Parties window changes to grey (logged off).




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                          8-29
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                              Nur für den internen Gebrauch
ACD Functions


8.8.3             ACD Post-Processing
If you need more time in addition to the time actually spent conducting a call, you can request/
activate a wrap-up time for the last call. The wrap-up time can be enabled only if you are logged
on.
You must deactivate the wrap-up time yourself and report back to the system.

             If autoworking is activated in the system, the wrap-up time is automatically set after
 >           each call and then deleted.

Enabling post-processing

Step         Action/Effect
     1       To enable ACD post-processing, click
             >     the ACD post-processing check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/
                   Telephone Directory/Call detail records window
             or
             >     the entry ACD post-processing in the context menu of the Connection parties
                   window.
     2       The check mark before the function option is set, and the ACD status in the Connec-
             tion Parties window changes to dark green (wrap-up).

Disabling Post-processing

Step         Action/Effect
     1       To disable ACD post-processing, click
             >     the ACD post-processing check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/
                   Telephone Directory/Call detail records window
             or
             >     the entry ACD post-processing in the context menu of the Connection parties
                   window.
     2       The check mark before the function option is removed, and the ACD status in the
             Connection Parties window changes to bright green (logged on).




                                                                  A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-30                                                                  optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
6office.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                      Using the optiClient office
                                                                              ACD Functions


8.8.4           ACD Unavailability
During working hours, you can log on and log off from the system, e.g., to take a break (tem-
porary logon/logoff).
Activating Unavailability

Step       Action/Effect
    1      To enable ACD unavailability, click
           >     the ACD not available check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/
                 Telephone Directory/Call detail records window
           or
           >     the entry ACD not available in the context menu of the Connection parties
                 window.
    2      The check mark before the function option is set, and the ACD status in the Connec-
           tion Parties window changes to dark blue (not available).

Disabling Unavailability

Step       Action/Effect
    1      To disable ACD unavailability, click
           >     the ACD not available check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/
                 Telephone Directory/Call detail records window
           or
           >     the entry ACD not available in the context menu of the Connection parties
                 window.
    2      The check mark before the function option is removed, and the ACD status in the
           Connection Parties window changes to bright green (logged on).

           If an agent does not answer a waiting call, the system switches automatically to Un-
 >         available.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                           8-31
6office.fm

Using the optiClient office                                             Nur für den internen Gebrauch
ACD Functions


8.8.5             Displaying the Number of Waiting Calls

Step         Action/Effect
     1       Select Number of Calls Waiting from the context menu of the ACD button in the
             Connection Parties window.
     2       The ACD button briefly shows the number of waiting calls - regardless of the current
             ACD status.


8.8.6             ACD Night Service
ACD night service is a separate night service for ACD that is not affected by system night an-
swer. All incoming calls are forwarded to a special ACD destination.

Activating Night Service


Step         Action/Effect
     1       To activate the ACD Night service, click
             >     the ACD Night extension check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/
                   Telephone Directory/Call detail records window
             or
             >     the entry ACD Night extension in the context menu of the Connection parties
                   window.
     2       The check mark before the function option is set.

Deactivating the Night Service


Step         Action/Effect
     1       To deactivate the ACD Night service, click
             >     the ACD Night extension check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/
                   Telephone Directory/Call detail records window
             or
             >     the entry ACD Night extension in the context menu of the Connection parties
                   window.
     2       The check mark before the function option is removed.




                                                                 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
8-32                                                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
7telefonb.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                   Electronic Telephone Directory




9            Electronic Telephone Directory
The optiClient 130 offers you - if available and configured - a central LDAP telephone directory
and a personal telephone directory. Whereas the central telephone directory (if any) is main-
tained by your administrator, you can customize the private directory to meet your own needs.
The telephone directory is available with identical functionality in both optiClient office and the
optiClient 130 phone. There are only a few differences in the controls. This description uses the
Telephone directory screens of the optiClient phone.

Starting Telephone Directory Management
You can start managing your phone books as follows:

in optiClient office:
Select the Telephone directory tab in the Functions / Telephone directory / Caller- and call
records window.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                               9-1
7telefonb.fm

Electronic Telephone Directory                                       Nur für den internen Gebrauch




in optiClient phone:
Click the Telephone directory button.




The telephone directory is opened near the optiClient phone window. The width of the optiClient
phone telephone book display can be altered.




                                                              A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
9-2                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
7telefonb.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                    Electronic Telephone Directory
                                                                               General Functions


9.1           General Functions

9.1.1         Selecting the Telephone Directory

General Information
If available and configured, a central telephone directory (LDAP directory) as well as a personal
directory are available to each user. You can select the desired phone directory from the Ad-
dress / Telephone directory list box in the Phone Book management function.
      –   optiClient office:
          You can select the desired phone directory from the Address / Telephone directory
          list box in the Phone Book management function.
      –   optiClient phone:
          Click the LDAP icon in Phone Book Management.

           By clicking on the telephone book key or the call list key in the optiClient phone, it is
 >         possible to directly switch between the two directories.


LDAP Telephone Directory
On selecting the LDAP telephone directory, this directory initially appears empty. You can go to
the desired position of the directory by entering the name to be located or a part thereof in the
input field and then clicking Search. This takes you to the first entry in the LDAP directory that
matches your search criteria. The total number of entries found is displayed in the table header.

           Ensure that the maximum number of entries returned per search request is set by
 >         the LDAP server administrator, as sometimes not all search results are displayed. If
           this is the case, the search criteria should be narrowed further.

           You can also search for parts of a last or first name in the LDAP directory. For exam-
 >         ple, you could enter "smi h" to search for all entries that have a last name beginning
           with Smi and a first name beginning with H, respectively (no distinction between up-
           percase and lowercase is made here)




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                 9-3
7telefonb.fm

Electronic Telephone Directory                                       Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Functions


9.1.2          Viewing Options of the Telephone Directory
The telephone directory is structured like a standard Windows table and can be edited accord-
ingly with respect to the column views.
You can:
>     Arrange the columns in the desired display order by dragging and dropping
>     Change the column widths by moving the column separators
>     Sort a column (in ascending or descending order) and thus the entire telephone directory
      by clicking the column header




                                                              A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
9-4                                                               optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
7telefonb.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                  Electronic Telephone Directory
                                                                             General Functions


9.1.3         Edit entries in the directory
Entries in the central LDAP directory can only be maintained centrally by the Administrator. In-
dividual users can maintain their own personal directories.

Copying an Entry from the LDAP directory to the Personal Telephone Directory
To copy an entry from the LDAP directory to your own personal telephone directory, proceed
as follows:
1.   Locate the appropriate entry in the LDAP directory.
2.   Select the menu item Add to personal tel. directory from the context menu.
3.   The entry will be copied to your personal telephone directory and can then be edited further
     from there.

Adding a New Entry to the Telephone Directory
1.   Open the context menu from any free area of the telephone directory and select New...

Display




2.   Enter the last name, address, contact numbers and e-mail address of the party.



A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                             9-5
7telefonb.fm

Electronic Telephone Directory                                         Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Functions


Number Verification
>     When you enter a phone number in an empty field (Telephone 1, Telephone 2 (Fax) and
      Telephone 3 (Mobile)) for the first time or double-click in a field containing data, a
      verification window to check the phone details appears:




      The phone number you entered is split into its individual components - to the extent that
      this can be logically derived - and displayed in the Country/Region, City/Area Code and
      Local Number fields. Correct these details if required and confirm your changes by click-
      ing OK. This returns you to the dialog to edit the telephone directory entry.

           Note that the dialing will not work properly unless you enter the phone number in
 >         canonical format, i.e., in the form +xx (yyyy) zzzz, where:
           ●   +xx
               is the international dialing prefix without the leading zeros,
           ●   (yyyy)
               is the local area code in parentheses and is separated from the international di-
               aling prefix by a space, The leading zero for the local area code (if relevant) can
               be entered.
           ●   zzzz
               is the local number and is separated from the local area code by a space.
           ●   Example for Germany: +49 (02302) 667-9876
           You may enter the number in the fields directly in this format or separate the compo-
           nents by spaces, which automatically causes the canonical notation to be used.

3.    You can also add your own notes on the contact by clicking the Notes button:




                                                                A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
9-6                                                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
7telefonb.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                 Electronic Telephone Directory
                                                                            General Functions


Display




     Save your notes by clicking OK. You will be returned to the Telephone directory dialog
     (step 2).

4.   Click OK to save these details. The new entry will now have been added to the personal
     telephone directory.
Editing a Telephone Directory Entry
If you want to edit an entry from your personal telephone directory, proceed as follows:
1.   Open the context menu of the entry and choose Edit...
2.   The dialog to edit the telephone directory entry appears. Edit the details as required. The
     verification dialog for phone numbers can be opened by double-clicking any phone number
     field.
3.   Click OK to save these details. The edited entry will be copied to your personal telephone
     directory.

Deleting a Telephone Directory Entry
To delete a telephone directory entry, proceed as follows:




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                            9-7
7telefonb.fm

Electronic Telephone Directory                                          Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Functions


1.    Open the context menu of the entry to be deleted and choose Delete.
2.    A confirmation prompt appears, which you can then acknowledge by clicking Yes. The en-
      try is deleted, and you return to the Telephone directory.


9.1.4          Finding a Contact in the Telephone Directory

Finding an Entry by Name
To start a simple search by name, enter the name you are looking for in the Last Name field.
With each entered character, the display of the contacts in the telephone directory jumps to the
first entry that corresponds to the one to be found.
You can search for parts of a last and first name using an LDAP directory. You could enter "smi
h" to search for all entries that have a last name beginning with Smi and a first name beginning
with H respectively (no distinction between uppercase and lowercase is made here).

Finding an Entry using Search Criteria
Such searches can only be performed in the personal telephone directory.
1.    Open the context menu of an entry in the telephone directory and select Search.
2.    A dialog box with empty search fields appears. These fields match the fields of the entry in
      the telephone directory. You can now enter your search criteria in the individual fields. The
      wildcard characters "*" and "?" may also be used here. Click OK to confirm your search
      criteria.
3.    The results of the search are displayed in the form of a telephone directory with the suffix
      (Search results) shown in the title.
      You can then switch back to the display of the complete telephone directory by selecting
      Display all from the context menu of the search results.




                                                                 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
9-8                                                                  optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
7telefonb.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                 Electronic Telephone Directory
                                                                            General Functions


9.1.5         Calling a Contact from the Telephone Directory
You can call any of the contacts listed in your telephone directory as follows:
1.   Open the context menu of the party to be called from the telephone directory.
2.   Click the Dial button. The party is called.
     or
     From the context menu of the party, select Dial and then choose one of the phone numbers
     entered for that party (Telephone 1, Telephone 2 or Telephone 3) from the submenu. The
     selected phone number of the party is called.


9.1.6         Sending an E-mail to a Contact
To send an e-mail to a contact listed in the telephone directory, proceed as follows:
1.   Open the context menu of the relevant contact from the telephone directory.
2.   From the context menu of the party, select Send e-mail... The e-mail application installed
     on your PC (e.g. Microsoft Outlook) is started with the input window for a new e-mail. The
     address of the recipient is automatically copied over from the telephone directory.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                               9-9
7telefonb.fm

Electronic Telephone Directory          Nur für den internen Gebrauch
General Functions




                                 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
9-10                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
8ruflisten.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                              Call List Management




10           Call List Management

          Call list management is only available, if the optiClient 130 V4 TAPI Service Provider
 >        has been correctly initialized on the client PC. In the event of an error, a message
          appears, the call list key disappears from the optiClient telephone user interface and
          no entries are saved in call list management.
The optiClient 130 offers you a convenient Call List management feature that enables various
call lists to be retrieved:
>    Missed calls
>    Received calls
>    Extensions not reached
>    Extensions reached
>    Calls made (= received calls + extensions reached)
Call list management is available with identical functionality in both the optiClient office as well
as the optiClient phone. There are only a few differences in the layout.
To start Call List Management in the optiClient phone:
Click the Call Lists button.




          By clicking on the telephone book key or the call list key in the optiClient phone, it is
 >        possible to directly switch between the two directories.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                               10-1
8ruflisten.fm

Call List Management                                                     Nur für den internen Gebrauch




To start Call List Management in the optiClient office:
Select the Caller- and call records tab in the Telephone directory window.




Selecting a Call List
To display one of the call lists indicated above, select it from the list box in the Call List Man-
agement function or click the corresponding icon:

Symbol          Call list
                Missed calls


                Received calls


                Extensions not reached


                Extensions reached


                Calls made (= received calls + extensions reached)




                                                                 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
10-2                                                                 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
8ruflisten.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                                Call List Management



Calling a Party from a Call List
Activate the desired call list. Then click the relevant caller or called party within this list and
choose Call.

Deleting a Call List
To delete a call list, mark the list to be deleted and click Delete records. When you delete the
call list for calls made, both the list of received calls and the list of stations reached are deleted.




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                                 10-3
8ruflisten.fm

Call List Management          Nur für den internen Gebrauch




                       A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
10-4                       optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
opticl130v40SIX.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                                       Index




Index                                  Z


                                           Answering calls 8-1
                                           Associated dial 7-3
A                                          Associated serv. 7-3
Accept call 7-4                            Attention ring volume 4-6, 5-7
Accepting a call 4-9, 8-1                  Available 7-6
Account code 7-3
ACD 8-27                                   C
ACD Functions 8-27                         Call Charge Display 8-19
ACD logged on 8-27                         Call Forwarding 8-17
ACD logoff 8-29                            Call forwarding
ACD logon 8-28                                disabling 8-17
ACD Night Service                             enabling 8-17
   diactivating 8-32                       Call List
   enabling 8-32                              selecting 10-2
ACD not available 8-27                     Call list
ACD Post-Processing 8-30                      calling a party 10-3
ACD post-processing 8-27, 8-30                deleting 10-3
   diabling 8-30                           Call List management 4-7
ACD status 5-14, 8-27                      Call list management 5-8, 8-14, 10-1
ACD unavailability                         Call on hold 5-28
   anabling 8-31                           Call pickup 8-1
   disabling 8-31                          Call pickup group 8-1
ACD waiting calls 8-32                     Call pickup in a call pickup group 8-1
Activate/deactivate headset 5-7            Call pickup, directed 8-1
Activating caller ID suppression 8-5       Call status display 5-28
Activating do not disturb 8-2              Call Transfer 8-11
Activating Night Service 8-18              Call wait.term.on 7-3
Activating ringer off 8-3                  Call wait.trm.off 7-3
Activating ringer on 8-3                   Call Waiting 8-16
Active call 5-28                           Call waiting 7-3
Adding a party to the conference 7-3       Call waiting tone
Administration rights 4-12, 5-12              enable 8-16
administration rights 4-12                 Callback 8-15
Administration tool 3-3                    Caller ID suppression 8-5
Advisory msg. off 7-3                      Caller List 7-3
Advisory msg. on 7-3                       Calls in queue 7-6
Answer call 7-4                            Calls made 10-1, 10-2
Answer page (not for U.S.) 7-4             canonical format 9-6
Answer text 8-23                           Change code 8-20
   cancel 8-23                             Change PIN 7-3

A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                     Z-1
opticl130v40SIX.fm

Index                                                            Nur für den internen Gebrauch




Change Speed-dial (station) 7-6             Electronic Telephone Directory 9-1
Changeover off 7-3                          E-mailing contacts 9-9
Changeover on 7-3                           En-bloc sending 7-3
Changing Codes 8-20                         End Conference 8-10
Code key 8-19                               End conference 7-3
Conference 7-3                              Ending a consultation call 8-9
Conference call 5-28                        ETD 9-1
Conferencing 8-10                           Exit 3-22
Configuring answer text 8-23                Expanding a Conference 8-10
Connecting conference parties 8-10          Extended Dialing Functions 8-7
Consult 7-3                                 Extensions not reached 10-1, 10-2
Consultation Hold 8-9                       Extensions reached 10-1, 10-2
Control Relay Off 7-3
Control Relay On 7-3                        F
conventions 1-5                             Forward Line
                                               Off 7-4
D                                              On 7-4
Data Protection and Data Security 1-9       Forwarding off 7-4
Deactivating caller ID suppression 8-5      Forwarding on 7-4
Deactivating do not disturb 8-2
Default Settings 3-2                        H
Default settings 3-3, 3-5                   Handset 3-16
Deleting Callback Orders 8-15               Hardware requirements 1-3
Dial 7-3                                    Headset 7-4
Dial prefix 3-15, 8-7                       HF answerback off 7-4
Dialing a party 8-5                         HF answerback on 7-4
Direct access 5-27                          Hotline 7-4
DISA 7-3                                    Hunting group 8-25
Disable Call Waiting 8-16                     activating 8-25
Display Mode 5-15                             deactivating 8-25
Display mode 4-15
Displaying Callback Orders 8-15             I
Displaying Sent Infos 8-22                  Incoming call 5-28
DND off 7-4                                 Infos 8-21
DND on 7-4                                  Initiating a Conference 8-10
Do not disturb feature 8-2                  Initiating a consultation call 8-9
Door opener off 7-4                         Initiating callback orders 8-15
Door opener on 7-4                          Initiating calls 8-5
Drop last conf. party (only for U.S.) 7-3   Installation 2-1, 10-1
DTMF dialing 7-4                            Installation Components 2-3
DTMF suffix dialing 8-24                    Internal DISA 7-3
DTMF transmission 8-24
                                            J
E                                           Join hunt group 7-4
Editing a Telephone Directory Entry 9-7
                                                         A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
Z-2                                                          optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
opticl130v40SIX.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                                                         Index



K                                           O
Key captions 4-9                            Open door 7-4
Key Modules 4-8                             optiClient easyCom 2-13
Key modules 4-14                            optiClient installation 2-12
                                            optiClient phone 2-13
L                                           Options 4-13, 5-13
Language selection 2-12                     Outgoing call 5-28
language selection 2-12                     Override 7-4
Leave all groups 7-4
Leave hunt group 7-4                        P
License 2-2, 3-6                            Page 7-4
License key 3-6                             Park a call 7-4
License number 3-2                          Parking a call 8-12
location information 2-10                   Parking Calls 8-12
Location properties 2-2                     PC keyboard 4-4
Lock all phones 7-4                         PC Performance 3-2, 3-7
Log off 7-6                                 Personal phone book 3-5
log off 7-5                                 Personal telephone directory 9-1
Log on 7-6                                  Phone book management 4-7
log on 7-5                                  Phone lock
Logged on 8-27                                 disabling 8-20
Logging in 3-12                                enabling 8-19
Login (Logon) 3-12                          Phone Test 7-4
Loudspeaker volume control 4-5, 5-6         Pickup - directed 7-4
                                            Pickup - group 7-4
M                                           Profile File 3-2, 3-12
Mailbox 7-5                                 Profile file 3-4
Microphone volume control 4-5               Prog. feature key 7-5
Mikrofon ausschalten 8-4                    Programming function keys 5-9
Minimizing the program to a button in the
 taskbar 4-3                                Q
Missed calls 10-1, 10-2                     QoS (Quality of Service) 2-4, 3-2
Monitoring 7-4                              Quit and return 7-3
Mute off 7-4
Mute on 7-4                                 R
                                            Reading Infos 8-21
N                                           Received calls 10-1, 10-2
Night answer off 7-4                        Redial 7-5, 8-14
Night answer on 7-4                         Reference Manuals 1-5
Night Service 8-32                          Reject call 7-5
Night service 8-18                          Rejoin all groups 7-4
   deactivating 8-18                        Release 7-5
Not available 7-6                           Relocate station 7-5
notational conventions 1-5                  Remote Access 3-12


A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                                                        Z-3
opticl130v40SIX.fm

Index                                                          Nur für den internen Gebrauch




Remove party 7-3                             Suppress call ID 7-5
Reserve trunk 7-5                            symbols in manual 1-5
Reset services 7-5                           System tray 5-5
Resetting functions 8-26
Restore caller ID 7-5                        T
Restoring the program from a button in the   Taskbar 4-3, 5-5
 taskbar 4-3                                 TDS codes 8-24
Retrieve call 7-4                            Tel. data service 7-5
Retrieve line 7-5                            Telephone Data Service 8-24
Retrieving a Parked Call 8-12                Telephone directory 4-17, 5-8, 5-16, 9-1
Return to held call 7-3                         adding an entry 9-5
Ring tone 4-6, 5-7                              calling a contact 9-9
Ring Transfer                                   finding a contact 9-8
   Off 7-5                                   Telephone directory entry
   On 7-5                                       deleting 9-7
Ring volume 4-6, 5-7                         Telephone directory server (LDAP) 4-17, 5-
Ringer cutoff off 7-5                         16
Ringer cutoff on 7-5                         Telephony 5-19
Ringer off 8-3                               Teleworking 3-14
Ringing group off 7-5                        Temporary MSN (not for U.S.) 7-5
Ringing group on 7-5                         Temporary Phone 7-5
Room monitor 7-5                             Terminating Calls 4-9, 8-8
Ruflisten 4-7                                Timed reminder off 7-5
                                             Timed reminder on 7-5
S                                            Toggle 8-11
Safety Information 1-6                       Toggle/Connect 7-5
safety information                           Trace call 7-5
   caution 1-7                               Transfer 7-5, 8-11
   danger 1-7                                Transfer/US
   warning 1-7                                  Accept call UK
Save number 7-3                                     Accept 7-3
Select language 7-5                          Trunk Flash 7-5
Selecting the Telephone Directory 9-3        Trunk FWD on 7-4
Sending Infos 8-21                           Trunk FWD out 7-4
Shift Key 7-5                                Turning on the microphone 8-4
Show call charges (own telephone) 7-5
Software requirements 1-3                    U
Sound card 3-17                              UCD 7-6
Speaker 3-17                                 UCD night off 7-6
Speaker call 7-5                             UCD night on 7-6
Speed-dial keys 5-20                         Update 4-11, 5-12
Speed-dial keys (icons) 5-20                 US
Start conference 7-3                            Callback UK
Starting the program 3-11                          Set Callback 7-6
                                                Directory UK
                                                        A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
Z-4                                                         optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
opticl130v40SIX.fm
Nur für den internen Gebrauch                               Index



      Phonebook 7-3
  View messages UK
      Display Messages 7-5
Use speed-dialing 7-6
User interface 4-2, 5-1, 6-1

V
Verification window 9-6
View call charges (other party’s telephone) 7-
 5
View callbacks/Delete 7-6
View conf parties 7-3
View sent message 7-5
Viewing Options of the Telephone Directory
 9-4
Views 4-21
Voice compression 3-15

W
Waiting tone off 7-3
Waiting tone on 7-3
Work off 7-6
Work on 7-6
Work time 8-30




A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual                              Z-5
opticl130v40SIX.fm

Index                       Nur für den internen Gebrauch




                     A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003
Z-6                      optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual

More Related Content

PDF
Siemens catalog hmi-tp070 touch panel
PDF
Siemens catalog hmi-tp070_e
PDF
Siemens catalog hmi-op3_e
PDF
Siemens catalog hmi-op3 operator panel
PDF
Siemens catalog hmi-op7-17 operator panel
PDF
Siemens catalog hmi-op717_e
PDF
172809159 sip
PDF
Siemens cp 242-8 as-interface master profibus-dp slave
Siemens catalog hmi-tp070 touch panel
Siemens catalog hmi-tp070_e
Siemens catalog hmi-op3_e
Siemens catalog hmi-op3 operator panel
Siemens catalog hmi-op7-17 operator panel
Siemens catalog hmi-op717_e
172809159 sip
Siemens cp 242-8 as-interface master profibus-dp slave

What's hot (20)

PDF
Siemens catalog hmi-tp27 - 37 touch panels
PDF
Siemens catalog hmi-tp2737_e
PDF
TLC_700_Controller_unit
PDF
2012 Chevy Express Owner's Manual Baltimore, Maryland
PDF
S7-1200 easy_book
PDF
PLC S7- 300 module data_manual_en-us_en-us
PDF
Intel Management Mode Firmware Runtime Update - OS Interface, revision 1.00
PDF
2012 Chevrolet Silverado Owner's Manual
PDF
bizhub PRESS 2250P Security User's Guide
PDF
Tai lieu plc s7 1200
PDF
Ideapad u310 u410_ug_v1.0_english
PDF
Bts3900 gsm site preparation guidelines (v300 r008-03)
PDF
Instruction Manual ATN Tico Series Thermal Imaging Clip On | Optics Trade
PDF
Instruction Manual ATN ThOR Series Thermal Weapon Sights | Optics Trade
PDF
Bts3900 Product Description (V300 R008 02)
PDF
Giao trinh-plc-s7-1200-easy book
PDF
Siemens pg 702 programming device
PDF
Hp compaq-pavilion-dv1000
PDF
10020253 turbo optic_oberflaeche_e
PDF
Siemens s7 300-400-standard software for s7-300 and s7-400 pid control
Siemens catalog hmi-tp27 - 37 touch panels
Siemens catalog hmi-tp2737_e
TLC_700_Controller_unit
2012 Chevy Express Owner's Manual Baltimore, Maryland
S7-1200 easy_book
PLC S7- 300 module data_manual_en-us_en-us
Intel Management Mode Firmware Runtime Update - OS Interface, revision 1.00
2012 Chevrolet Silverado Owner's Manual
bizhub PRESS 2250P Security User's Guide
Tai lieu plc s7 1200
Ideapad u310 u410_ug_v1.0_english
Bts3900 gsm site preparation guidelines (v300 r008-03)
Instruction Manual ATN Tico Series Thermal Imaging Clip On | Optics Trade
Instruction Manual ATN ThOR Series Thermal Weapon Sights | Optics Trade
Bts3900 Product Description (V300 R008 02)
Giao trinh-plc-s7-1200-easy book
Siemens pg 702 programming device
Hp compaq-pavilion-dv1000
10020253 turbo optic_oberflaeche_e
Siemens s7 300-400-standard software for s7-300 and s7-400 pid control
Ad

Viewers also liked (20)

PDF
Call for papers. N. 49 Revista Comunicar . La educación en comunicación en el...
PDF
Bilagsrapport 3 brs risikovurdering pur-pir-20141201
PPTX
Camas capri
PDF
Aula inter cienc_nat_ii_2012
PPTX
Thirds of the Soccer Field by Dr. Dina Gentile
PPT
Asociacion Gata
PDF
Despertando Mi Curiosidad Científica - ÓPTICA
PDF
Marcas en Crecimiento: retos, reflexiones y oportunidades
PPSX
Mi bebé y yo i
PDF
El derecho tributario y el derecho concursal como interdisciplina. la necesid...
DOCX
Qué es Arpanet
PDF
Unidad 1-tablas
PDF
August-LINK-FINAL 2006
PDF
iBeacon meetup amsterdam
PDF
5 prácticas esenciales para desarrollar una estrategia de fidelización y rent...
PPT
Catalogo Nutrilite Quixtar 08
PDF
Quality of life experiences No.2
PPTX
Embarazo ectópico completa
PPTX
Lección 3. Leer un archivo CSV en R
Call for papers. N. 49 Revista Comunicar . La educación en comunicación en el...
Bilagsrapport 3 brs risikovurdering pur-pir-20141201
Camas capri
Aula inter cienc_nat_ii_2012
Thirds of the Soccer Field by Dr. Dina Gentile
Asociacion Gata
Despertando Mi Curiosidad Científica - ÓPTICA
Marcas en Crecimiento: retos, reflexiones y oportunidades
Mi bebé y yo i
El derecho tributario y el derecho concursal como interdisciplina. la necesid...
Qué es Arpanet
Unidad 1-tablas
August-LINK-FINAL 2006
iBeacon meetup amsterdam
5 prácticas esenciales para desarrollar una estrategia de fidelización y rent...
Catalogo Nutrilite Quixtar 08
Quality of life experiences No.2
Embarazo ectópico completa
Lección 3. Leer un archivo CSV en R
Ad

Similar to Oc130 v4hp3000ug (20)

PDF
Manual CLP Omron CP1H
PDF
Siemens pg 702 programming device
PDF
Simatic protool manual
PDF
Ap51 xx reference_guide
PDF
Ap51 xx reference_guide
PDF
Netop Remote Control Security Overview
PDF
Hi path 3000 &amp; 5000 v8 manager c administrator documentation issue 6
PDF
Instruction Guide _ DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Configuration and Troubleshooting...
PDF
Siemens s7 300-400-testing your s7 programs with s7 plcsim
PDF
Catalog 2017-eng
PDF
PDF
Siemens s7 300-400-sm 338 ultrasonic position encoding module
PDF
Scada Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition 3rd Edition 3rd Stuart A Boyer...
PDF
Modifying infor erp_syte_line_5140
PDF
Ipcam user guide_4.1.3
PDF
VoIP GP ( Updated with Int )
PDF
Honeywell igsmhs-install-guide
PDF
Polycom ip soundstation_ip_administrators_guide_v2_2
PDF
Siemens s7 300-400-simatic couter module cm35
PDF
Book - Automating with SIMATIC_ Controllers, Software, Programming, Data Comm...
Manual CLP Omron CP1H
Siemens pg 702 programming device
Simatic protool manual
Ap51 xx reference_guide
Ap51 xx reference_guide
Netop Remote Control Security Overview
Hi path 3000 &amp; 5000 v8 manager c administrator documentation issue 6
Instruction Guide _ DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Configuration and Troubleshooting...
Siemens s7 300-400-testing your s7 programs with s7 plcsim
Catalog 2017-eng
Siemens s7 300-400-sm 338 ultrasonic position encoding module
Scada Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition 3rd Edition 3rd Stuart A Boyer...
Modifying infor erp_syte_line_5140
Ipcam user guide_4.1.3
VoIP GP ( Updated with Int )
Honeywell igsmhs-install-guide
Polycom ip soundstation_ip_administrators_guide_v2_2
Siemens s7 300-400-simatic couter module cm35
Book - Automating with SIMATIC_ Controllers, Software, Programming, Data Comm...

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
Travel Inventory Management | Hotel Inventory Management System
PDF
Step Into Lima’s Magic Explore Peru’s Historic Capital From Anywhere.pdf
PPTX
MALDIVES.pptx.pptx short power point to guide your explanation
PPTX
The Tourism potential of Uzbekistan.pptx
PPSX
Detian Transnational Waterfall, Chongzuo, Guangxi, CN. (中國 廣西崇左市 德天跨國瀑布).ppsx
PDF
Best Tour Operators in Rajasthan India, Rajasthan Tour Package - Rajasthan To...
PDF
Introduction of Secrets of Mount Kailash.pdf
PDF
When is the best time to Visit Kailash Mansarovar.pdf
PDF
The Best Travel Guide to India’s Golden Triangle.pdf
PDF
Dubai Garden Glow – A magical visit to spend Evening
PDF
International Kailash Mansarovar Yatra, Visa, Permits, and Package.pdf
PDF
chopta tour package from delhi chopta tour
PDF
How to Travel from Mumbai to Kailash Mansarovar.pdf
PDF
Delhi to Kashmir Tour Package at Best Price.pdf
PDF
Hyderabad to Pune Flight – Complete Travel Guide.pdf
PDF
How Do You Plan a Kailash Mansarovar Pilgrimage.pdf
PDF
8 Days in Sri Lanka with Just a Backpack – Here's How
PDF
Eric Albuja Shares 5 Must-Try Travel Tech Tools for 2025.pdf
PPTX
How Trade Tariffs Impacted Travel and Passport Services in the USA
DOCX
Experience Egypt with All Inclusive Egypt Tour Packages
Travel Inventory Management | Hotel Inventory Management System
Step Into Lima’s Magic Explore Peru’s Historic Capital From Anywhere.pdf
MALDIVES.pptx.pptx short power point to guide your explanation
The Tourism potential of Uzbekistan.pptx
Detian Transnational Waterfall, Chongzuo, Guangxi, CN. (中國 廣西崇左市 德天跨國瀑布).ppsx
Best Tour Operators in Rajasthan India, Rajasthan Tour Package - Rajasthan To...
Introduction of Secrets of Mount Kailash.pdf
When is the best time to Visit Kailash Mansarovar.pdf
The Best Travel Guide to India’s Golden Triangle.pdf
Dubai Garden Glow – A magical visit to spend Evening
International Kailash Mansarovar Yatra, Visa, Permits, and Package.pdf
chopta tour package from delhi chopta tour
How to Travel from Mumbai to Kailash Mansarovar.pdf
Delhi to Kashmir Tour Package at Best Price.pdf
Hyderabad to Pune Flight – Complete Travel Guide.pdf
How Do You Plan a Kailash Mansarovar Pilgrimage.pdf
8 Days in Sri Lanka with Just a Backpack – Here's How
Eric Albuja Shares 5 Must-Try Travel Tech Tools for 2025.pdf
How Trade Tariffs Impacted Travel and Passport Services in the USA
Experience Egypt with All Inclusive Egypt Tour Packages

Oc130 v4hp3000ug

  • 1. User Manual HiPath 3000/5000 HiPath optiClient 130 Version 4.0 May 2003 OP5374-00
  • 2. Warning Hackers who unlawfully gain access to customer telecommunications systems are criminals. Currently, we do not know of any telecommunications system that is immune to this type of criminal activity. Siemens Informa- tion and Communication Networks, Inc. will not accept liability for any damages, including long distance charg- es, which result from unauthorized use. Although Siemens has designed security features into its products, it is your sole responsibility to use the security features and to establish security practices within your company, including training, security awareness, and call auditing. Siemens sales and service personnel, as well as Siemens business partners, are available to work with you to help you guard against this unauthorized use of your telecommunications system. May 2003 Job No. 5374 No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without prior written permission of Siemens. The software described in this publication is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of that agreement. Request Siemens publications from your Siemens representative or the Siemens branch serving you. Publi- cations are not stocked at the address below. Siemens Information and Communication Networks, Inc. 1700 Technology Drive San Jose, CA 95110 (408) 492-2000 1 (800) 765-6123 Fax: (408) 492-3430 Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG. All other trademarks and company names are the property of their respective owners. Copyright Siemens Information and Communication Networks, Inc. 2003. All rights reserved.
  • 4. *1PA31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9* 1P A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9 The information in this document contains general descriptions of the technical opti- ons available, which do not always have to be present in individual cases. The required features should therefore be specified in each individual case at the time of closing the contract.  Siemens AG 2003 ● Information and Communication Networks, Hofmannstraße 51, D-81359 München, Germany Reference No.: A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany. ● Subject to availability. Right of modification reserved.
  • 5. Introduction and Important Notes 1 Installation 2 HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 optiClient 130 First Steps and User Configuration 3 optiClient phone User Interface 4 User Manual optiClient office User Interface 5 optiClient easyCom User Interface 6 Using the optiClient phone 7 Using the optiClient office 8 Electronic Telephone Directory 9 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9 Call List Management 10
  • 7. opticl130v40IVZ.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Contents Contents 0 short MS-HTML help name E-Doku path V2.0(relative) E-Doku Pfad V3.0(relative) name e.g., eshb_hlp.chm z.B.: ../../../../bk1/01/bh/01 e.g.: ../bk1 e.g., eshb easyCom easyCom_EN.chm ../11 ../12optiClient130easyCom 1 Introduction and Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1.1 Hardware and Software Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1.2 Target Group and Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 1.3 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 1.3.1 Safety information: Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 1.3.2 Safety information: Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 1.3.3 Safety information: Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 1.3.4 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 1.4 Data Protection and Data Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2.2 Configuring/installing Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 2.3 Configuring Location Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2.4 optiClient Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 3 First Steps and User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3.2 Working with the Administration Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3.2.1 Configuring PC settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 3.2.2 Configuring Setup information (License information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 3.2.3 Configuring Parameters for PC Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 3.2.4 Configuring Parameters for Quality of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 3.3 Starting the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 3.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 3.4.1 Logging on with a new telephone number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 3.4.2 Extended Options parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 3.4.2.1 General parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 3.4.2.2 Audio parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 3.4.2.3 Telephone Directory parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 3.4.2.4 Update parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 3.4.2.5 Server parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 3.5 Changing the User Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 0-1
  • 8. opticl130v40IVZ.fm Contents Nur für den internen Gebrauch 3.6 Exiting optiClient phone / office / easyCom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 4 optiClient phone User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1 Layout of the optiClient phone User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4.2 General Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4.2.1 Using the PC keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 4.2.2 Setting the speaker and microphone volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 4.2.3 Special Tone Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 4.2.4 Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 4.2.5 Telephone Directory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 4.2.6 Call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 4.2.7 Key Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 4.2.8 Key Captions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 4.2.9 Accepting / Terminating a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 4.3 Information on the optiClient phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 4.4 Manual Update Check for the optiClient phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 4.5 Option Settings for the optiClient phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 4.5.1 General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 4.5.2 Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 4.5.3 Telephone Directory Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4.5.3.1 Telephone Directory Options - LDAP Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 4.5.4 Telephony Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 4.6 View Settings for the optiClient phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 4.7 Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 5 optiClient office User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1 Layout of the optiClient office User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.2 General Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.2.1 Opening and Closing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 5.2.2 Minimizing optiClient office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 5.2.3 Changing your Code Key (PIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 5.2.4 Setting the speaker and microphone volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 5.2.5 Special Tone Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5.2.6 Headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5.2.7 Telephone Directory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 5.2.8 Call List Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 5.2.9 Programming the Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 5.3 Information on the optiClient office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 5.4 Manual Update Check for optiClient office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 5.5 Option Settings for the optiClient office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 5.5.1 General Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 5.5.2 Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 5.5.3 Telephone directory options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 5.5.3.1 Telephone directory options - LDAP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 5.5.4 Telephony Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 0-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 9. opticl130v40IVZ.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Contents 5.5.5 Speed-dial Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 5.6 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 5.7 Connection Parties Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 5.7.1 Call status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 5.8 Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 6 optiClient easyCom User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 7 Using the optiClient phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.1 Extended Dialing Functions Using Drag & Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.2 Basic and advanced functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.3 Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 8 Using the optiClient office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.1 Making and Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.1.1 Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.1.2 Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.1.3 Do Not Disturb Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.1.4 Ringer Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8.1.5 Microphone on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 8.2 Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 8.2.1 Caller ID Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 8.2.2 Initiating Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 8.2.3 Extended Dialing Functions per Drag & Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 8.2.4 Terminating Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 8.3 Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 8.3.1 Consultation Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 8.3.2 Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 8.3.3 Toggle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 8.3.4 Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 8.3.5 Parking Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 8.4 Making Calls to Stored Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 8.4.1 Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 8.4.2 Call Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 8.5 If You Cannot Reach a Destination... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 8.5.1 Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 8.5.2 Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 8.6 Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 8.6.1 Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 8.6.2 Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 8.7 Using Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 8.7.1 Displaying Call Charges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 8.7.2 Telephone Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 8.7.3 Infos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 8.7.4 Answer Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 8.7.5 Telephone Data Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 0-3
  • 10. opticl130v40IVZ.fm Contents Nur für den internen Gebrauch 8.7.6 DTMF Suffix Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 8.7.7 Hunting Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 8.7.8 Resetting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 8.8 ACD Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 8.8.1 ACD Logon (Logging on to System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 8.8.2 ACD Logoff (Logging off from the System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 8.8.3 ACD Post-Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 8.8.4 ACD Unavailability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 8.8.5 Displaying the Number of Waiting Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 8.8.6 ACD Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32 9 Electronic Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 9.1 General Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 9.1.1 Selecting the Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 9.1.2 Viewing Options of the Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 9.1.3 Edit entries in the directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 9.1.4 Finding a Contact in the Telephone Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 9.1.5 Calling a Contact from the Telephone Directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 9.1.6 Sending an E-mail to a Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 10 Call List Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 0-4 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 11. 1einl.fm Introduction and Important Notes Nur für den internen Gebrauch 1 Introduction and Important Notes This documentation describes the installation, user configuration and use of the > optiClient 130 V4.0. In order to make this documentation easier to read, the terms optiClient 130 (for the overall product) and optiClient phone or optiClient office as well as optiClient easyCom are used for the respective user interfaces. General Information The optiClient 130 is a telephony application that can be run on a PC. It permits phone calls to be conducted via a LAN (Voice over IP) in conjunction with the HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 commu- nication system. The HG 1500 board of the HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 enables the connection with optiClient 130 via a LAN connection. The maximum number of clients that can be connected are as follows: HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0 V3.0 or earlier V3.0 or later ● Office Pro A maximum of 3 HG1500 A maximum of 8 HG1500 boards boards with 48 clients per with 96 clients each for a maximum HG1500 of 500 clients (of which 16 stations can es- (outside the LAN, 16 stations can tablish a connection simulta- simultaneously set up a connection neously) in each HG1500). ● Office Com A maximum of 2 HG1500 A maximum of 4 HG1500 boards boards with 48 clients each with 48 clients each (of which 8 stations can es- (outside the LAN, 8 stations can si- tablish a connection simulta- multaneously set up a connection in neously) each HG1500). ● Office Point A maximum of 1 HG1500 A maximum of 2 HG1500 boards board with 48 clients with 48 clients each (of which 8 stations can es- (outside the LAN, 8 stations can si- tablish a connection simulta- multaneously set up a connection in neously) each HG1500). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 1-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 12. 1einl.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Introduction and Important Notes Hardware and Software Requirements 1.1 Hardware and Software Requirements Hardware ● Minimum processor and RAM requirements for optiClient 130 phone/office: Windows 98SE Windows 2000 Windows XP Processor Pentium II with Pentium III with Pentium III with 233 MHz 450 MHz 450 MHz RAM at least 64 MB at least 128 MB at least 256 MB ● Minimum processor and RAM requirements for optiClient 130 easyCom: Windows 98SE Windows 2000 Windows XP Processor Pentium II with Pentium III with Pentium III with 450 MHz 450 MHz 450 MHz RAM at least 128 MB at least 256 MB at least 256 MB > These specifications are minimum requirements. optiClient 130 is an application that transfers incoming and outgoing voice packets in real time. This means that the PC being used must have enough CPU capacity and system resources avail- able for optiClient 130 and other applications. If other applications overload the CPU at the same time, voice quality may suffer as a result. > Please consult the Readme file on the system CD for further information on optiClient 130. ● 150 MB free hard disk space ● CD-ROM drive ● Ethernet adapter (for QoS functionality with 802.1p support) ● Full-duplex sound card or optiPoint handset ● In addition, when using a sound card : – Microphone and speaker (possibly also handset or headset) or – a multimedia keyboard with or without a hookswitch. The hookswitch will only work un- der Windows 2000. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 1-3
  • 13. 1einl.fm Introduction and Important Notes Nur für den internen Gebrauch Hardware and Software Requirements Software ● Operating system Windows 98 SE, Windows 2000 (SP2) or Windows XP ● The installation software for the optiClient 130 on the system CD offers you the following two user interfaces, depending on the HiPath system connected: – optiClient 130 phone: An optPoint-based user interface called the “optiClient phone User Interface” in the following documentation. – optiClient 130 office: a system bar-based user interface called the “optiClient office User Interface“ in the following documentation. – optiClient 130 easyCom a system bar-based user interface called the “optiClient easyCom User Interface“ in the following documentation. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 1-4 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 14. 1einl.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Introduction and Important Notes Target Group and Requirements 1.2 Target Group and Requirements The Installation chapter supports service technicians on installation and startup. All other chapters provide an overview of the product and serve as a reference to assist the user in getting started. Prerequisites A basic knowledge of Windows and familiarity with Windows-specific terminology (e.g. "dialog box", "context menu", etc.) are also required. Reference Documentation ● Operating Instructions for the optiPoint telephone ● Service documentation HG1500 Notational Conventions and Symbols Used This manual uses the following conventions: Italics The names of menus, dialog boxes, and icons and the names of referenced manuals are printed in italics. Courier font Examples of screen messages and entries to be made in response to input prompts or in initialization files are indicated using the Courier font. Boldface The names of folders, tabs, menu options, commands and buttons are printed in boldface. This manual uses the following symbols: “i” identifies useful information. > Safety Information 7 Hazard information. See section Safety Information for details. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 1-5
  • 15. 1einl.fm Introduction and Important Notes Nur für den internen Gebrauch Safety Information 1.3 Safety Information Only service personnel and authorized specialists are permitted to work on the installation. Observe the following information: ● Read through all the information on the equipment carefully and follow all the safety guide- lines. Make sure that you also note down the emergency numbers. ● Always contact your manager before starting any work where the necessary safety precau- tions do not appear to be in place. Types of safety information This manual uses three types of safety information: Danger 7 Danger symbols call attention to a situation that could cause serious injury or death to a person. Warning: 7 Warning symbols call attention to a situation that could cause serious injury to a per- son. Caution 7 Hazards that can cause damage to the hardware and software and even destroy it. Further symbols for defining the source of danger in greater detail1: 1 5 3 0 6 4 2 Electricity Weight: Heat Fire Chemicals ESD* Laser * Electrostatically sensitive devices 1. These symbols are normally not used in the manual. They only explain the symbols that may appear on the systems. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 1-6 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 16. 1einl.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Introduction and Important Notes Safety Information 1.3.1 Safety information: Danger ● If the power cable appears to be damaged, replace it immediately. ● Only personnel with proper qualifications or authorized electricians should perform work on the low-voltage network (100 - 240 V AC). ● During a thunderstorm, you should not connect or remove telephone lines and PC boards. ● Expect to encounter leakage current from the telecommunications network. Disconnect all telecommunications cables from the system before unplugging the ground wire from the system. ● Ensure that the installation is never left unsupervised whenever work is carried out on an open installation. 1.3.2 Safety information: Warning ● There is the risk of an explosion if the lithium battery is not replaced correctly. The lithium battery must be replaced only by the same or equivalent types recommended by the deal- er. (Always dispose of lithium batteries properly.) ● If there are any optical interfaces: possibility of laser radiation: do not look directly into the beam. 1.3.3 Safety information: Caution ● Prior to startup, check the set nominal voltage of the installation (operating instructions and nameplate). ● As long as the power supply is switched on, always observe the greatest caution when per- forming measurements on powered components and maintenance work on plug-in cards, PC boards and covers. ● Disconnect all power plugs in the system when you need to turn off the system power sup- ply. ● To protect electrostatically sensitive devices (ESD): – Always wear the wristband in the prescribed manner before performing any work on PC boards and modules. – Transport PC boards only in suitable protective packaging. – Always place the PC boards on a grounded conducting base, and do not work on the PC boards anywhere else. – Only use grounded soldering irons. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 1-7
  • 17. 1einl.fm Introduction and Important Notes Nur für den internen Gebrauch Safety Information ● Install cables in such a way that they do not pose an accident risk (by people tripping over them) and also so that they are not damaged. 1.3.4 General Notes ● If the installation is brought into the operating site from a cold environment, condensation may occur. Wait until the temperature of the installation has adjusted to the ambient tem- perature and make sure that the system is absolutely dry before you start it. ● Before starting a wall assembly, check whether the load-bearing capacity of the wall is ad- equate, e.g., in the case of dry walls. ● When maintenance work has been completed, always re-install all safety equipment in the right place. Also close all doors, covers, or the housing after completing test and mainte- nance work. ● All cables and lines which leave a system cabinet must be shielded at least between the connection point in the cabinet and the point at which the cable leaves the cabinet. Use a clip and pressure screw to contact all shield fabric to the cabinet outlet. This also applies to permanently connected service equipment. ● Connect all cables only to the specified connection points. ● Do not install any external modems in the installation cabinets. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 1-8 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 18. 1einl.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Introduction and Important Notes Data Protection and Data Security 1.4 Data Protection and Data Security This system also processes and uses personal data for purposes such as call detail recording, displays, and customer data acquisition. In Germany, the processing and use of personal data are subject to various regulations, includ- ing the regulations of the Federal Data Protection Law (Bundesdatenschutzgesetz = BDSG). For other countries, please follow the appropriate national laws. The aim of data protection is to protect the rights of individuals being affected by use of their personal data. In addition, the aim of data protection is to prevent the misuse of data when it is processed and to ensure that one’s own interests and the interests of other parties which need to be protected are not affected. Members of Siemens and Siemens Rolm staff are required to observe business and data secrecy as a result of the company’s work rules. In order to ensure that the statutory requirements during service – whether during "on-site ser- vice" or during "remote service" – are consistently met, you should always observe the following rules. You will not only maintain the interests of your and our customers, you will also avoid per- sonal consequences. Conscious action helps maintain data protection and data security: ● Ensure that only appropriately authorized persons have access to customer data. ● Take full advantage of password assignment options; do not allow unauthorized persons to gain access to passwords by writing them down on a piece of paper or through other means. ● Ensure that no unauthorized person is able to process (store, modify, transmit, disable, de- lete) or use customer data in any way. ● Prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access to data media, e. g., on backup disks or printed reports. This applies to service calls as well as to storage and transport. ● Ensure that data media which are no longer required are completely destroyed. Ensure that no papers remain generally available. Work together with your contacts at the customer’s company: This creates mutual con- fidence and reduces your own workload. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 1-9
  • 19. 1einl.fm Introduction and Important Notes Nur für den internen Gebrauch Data Protection and Data Security A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 1-10 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 20. 2install.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installation 2 Installation This section contains information on the following topics: ● General Information ● Configuring/installing Quality of Service ● Configuring Location Information ● optiClient Installation Procedure A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 2-1
  • 21. 2install.fm Installation Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Information 2.1 General Information QoS (Quality of Service) To guarantee optimum voice quality in the network, QoS service installation and configuration must first be performed and checked in Windows (see Section Configuring/installing Quality of Service). Configuring location properties Client PC location properties must be configured on the client PC to ensure smooth optiClient operation (e.g. dial prefix; see section QoS RSVP service deactivation). Internet Explorer In order to run the optiClient 130 properly, you will need to have Internet Explorer 4.0.1 with Service Pack 2 or a later version installed. Installation Medium/License A CD with the following code number label is supplied as the installation medium for optiClient 130: ● HiPath 3000/5000 optiClient 130 V4.0 System CD P30370-P182-A1-* ● HiPath 3000/5000 optiClient 130 V4.0 Upgrade System CD P30370-P183-A1-* The license number required for the installation is located on the reverse side of the CD case. Always keep the license number in a safe place! No replacement license numbers > can be issued in the case of misplacement or loss. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 2-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 22. 2install.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installation General Information Installation Components The following components are installed during the optiClient 130 installation: – optiClient 130 (application software) – optiClient 130 V2 TAPI Service Provider Service Provider of the optiClient 130; bidirectional TAPI (also used by other applications) A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 2-3
  • 23. 2install.fm Installation Nur für den internen Gebrauch Configuring/installing Quality of Service 2.2 Configuring/installing Quality of Service General optiClient 130 can use the Windows QoS packet scheduler (Quality of Service) for network traf- fic control in order to optimize voice quality. This service gives telephony packages priority over "normal" data packets. The following applies depending on the Windows variant installed on the client PC: ● Windows 2000 / XP: The QoS features required are supported by the operating system. The required configu- ration steps are described below. ● under Windows 98SE: Only limited QoS features, if any, are supported. No further configuration steps are re- quired for activation. If QoS is to be implemented, the service must be installed and configured on the client PC. The following may occur when transferring data in IP networks: ● Time problems as a result of large e-mail attachments and Web surfing ● Network congestion as a result of multiple requests for the same Web page ● Reduced voice quality as a result of: – delays – jitter – packet loss Quality of Service incorporates various methods to ensure the transfer of certain properties in packet-oriented networks (IP). It is therefore important to ensure a minimum bandwidth for the duration of the transfer for Voice over IP, for example. The available bandwidth of a transmission path (a 64 Kbps ISDN B chan- nel, for example) is divided up if several applications run simultaneously via IP. As a result, pa- cket losses leading to poor voice quality may occur in the case of a voice connection. In HiPath networks, various types of traffic are transported via a single IP infrastructure. Quality of Service aims to meet data and voice traffic requirements. A high priority must be assigned to voice traffic to prevent it from being suppressed by data traf- fic. In addition, it must be specified that high-priority traffic is to be transferred before low-priority traffic. These specifications are performed in Layer 2 and 3: ● In Layer 2, the three bits are used in the 802.1p field (the part of the 802.1Q day). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 2-4 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 24. 2install.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installation Configuring/installing Quality of Service ● In Layer 3, the six bits of the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) field are used in the Type of Ser- vice (ToS) byte of the IP header. It is also important to ensure that there is sufficient bandwidth within the QoS class (Codepoint/ IEEE802.1p User Priority) used. QoS activation for the optiClient 1. QoS must only be activated in optiClient 130 V4.0 Administration for use under Windows 2000 (see Section 3.2.3, “Configuring Parameters for PC Performance”). 2. QoS must be provided on the relevant client PCs, i.e. installed and configured. 3. An unused QoS service for network traffic management, must be deactivated on the client PCs. To install and configure QoS on the client PC, proceed as follows: For optimum network traffic control, the optiClient client PC with the installed net- > work adapter as well as all other relevant components (routers, switches, servers, etc.) must support QoS. Step Procedure 1 Open the context menu for My Network Places on the desktop and select Properties. 2 In the Network and Dial-up Connections dialog, open the context menu for Local Area Connection and select Properties. ● If the QoS packet scheduler is not yet available, continue with Step 3 to install the QoS packet scheduler. ● If the entry exists, ensure it is activated (check mark in the box) and continue with Step 4. 3 The Local Area Connection Properties dialog appears. ● If there is no QoS Packet Scheduler entry there, continue with Step 4 to install the QoS packet scheduler. ● If the entry exists, ensure it is activated (check mark in the box) and continue with Step 6. 4 Click Install.... Select Service in the Network Component Type dialog and click Add.... A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 2-5
  • 25. 2install.fm Installation Nur für den internen Gebrauch Configuring/installing Quality of Service Step Procedure 5 In the Select Network Service dialog, click QoS Packet Scheduler and click OK. The service is installed. Upon completion of this task, you are returned to the prop- erties dialog (as in Step 3) in which the QoS Packet Scheduler entry is displayed and activated: Display 6 Click the Configure button for network card connection configuration. The properties dialog for the installed network card appears. Click the Advanced Settings tab. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 2-6 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 26. 2install.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installation Configuring/installing Quality of Service Step Procedure 7 Select Enable for the 802.1p Support property: Display A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 2-7
  • 27. 2install.fm Installation Nur für den internen Gebrauch Configuring/installing Quality of Service Step Procedure 8 Select Enable for Flow Control: Display 9 ● Click OK to confirm. ● You return to the Local Area Connection Properties dialog as in Step 3, which you can also exit by clicking OK. ● Finally, close the Network and Dial-up Connections dialog. This completes the installation/configuration of QoS on the client PC. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 2-8 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 28. 2install.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installation Configuring/installing Quality of Service QoS RSVP service deactivation The service that manages the QoS RSVP (Resource Reservation Protocol) must now be de- activated to ensure that the system runs correctly: Step Procedure 1 Start the service administration tool in Windows 2000 by selecting Settings - Control Panel - Administrative Tools - Services. Display 2 Open the context menu for the entry QoS RSVP and select Stop. 3 Close the service administration tool. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 2-9
  • 29. 2install.fm Installation Nur für den internen Gebrauch Configuring Location Information 2.3 Configuring Location Information General Information In order to run the optiClient 130 correctly, all your personal location information must be en- tered accurately. If these options are missing or have errors, you will not be able to correctly dial any entries from the phone book or call lists. Step Procedure 1 ● Select Start - Settings - Control Panel - Phone and Modem Options: Display A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 2-10 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 30. 2install.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installation Configuring Location Information Step Procedure 2 Enable the personal location entry and select Edit. ● In the Location name field, enter the name of your location and, separated by a space, the extension number (667 in the example). This extension number helps to identify internal phone numbers in the telephone directory, for which only in- ternal connections can be made when called. ● Enter your Area Code without the leading zero. ● If a trunk access number was configured on the system, it must be entered in the outside line for local calls and outside line for long-distance calls fields. Display 3 Click OK to confirm your selection. You return to the dialog as in Step 1, which you can also exit by clicking OK. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 2-11
  • 31. 2install.fm Installation Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient Installation Procedure 2.4 optiClient Installation Procedure You can install the latest version of the optiClient 130 using the convenient InstallShield instal- lation program. Step Procedure 1 Insert the installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. The installation program starts au- tomatically. If the inserted CD does not start automatically because of the settings in the control panel, start the installation program under <CD-ROM Drive>:setup.exe. 2 A browser window appears. Select the optiClient 130 V4 installieren/Install opti- Client 130 V4 option. A Welcome dialog appears. Click Next > to confirm. 3 If you accept the conditions of the displayed license agreement, click the corre- sponding option and continue with Next. 4 You are then required to enter the user information (Name/Organization) and the License key. You find the license key on the back of your CD package. Activate the required option under This application is installed for. Then click Continue. 5 Select the language(s) in which the application should be installed in the dialog that appears. The following languages are available: ● English (will always be installed) ● German ● Dutch ● Italian ● Spanish ● Portuguese ● French Click Next > to confirm your selection. 6 Select the type of setup for the installation: ● For the complete installation, the optiClient is installed in the default installation folder C:Program FilesSiemensoptiClient 130 V4. ● For a custom installation, you can select a different installation folder. Ensure that an "optiClient 130 V4" subfolder is always created in the selected folder. Additional optiClient installation folders to which all the necessary files are co- pied, are created in this folder. 7 A dialog is displayed indicating that you are ready to install. Confirm by clicking In- stall. The progress of the installation is displayed in a progress bar. 8 After the installation is finished, a corresponding message appears, which you can confirm by clicking Finish. You return to the Browser window (see step 2) which you can close by clicking Exit. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 2-12 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 32. 2install.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Installation optiClient Installation Procedure Shortcuts on the Desktop One desktop icon each is created for optiClient phone, optiClient office, and optiClient easy- Com. If you do not want to keep the desktop shortcuts, you can remove them. The programs are still available via the Start menu. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 2-13
  • 33. 2install.fm Installation Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient Installation Procedure A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 2-14 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 34. 3benkonf.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch First Steps and User Configuration 3 First Steps and User Configuration This section contains the following information: ● General ● Working with the Administration Tool ● Starting the Program ● Logging on ● Logging on with a new telephone number ● Changing the User Password ● Exiting optiClient phone / office / easyCom A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 3-1
  • 35. 3benkonf.fm First Steps and User Configuration Nur für den internen Gebrauch General 3.1 General Profile File The optiClient 130 works with a profile file, from which the phone number configuration para- maters needed for proper functionality are read at login. If you log on with a phone number that is not recognized by the profile file, you can configure the parameters required for it during the login procedure. On completing the login procedure successfully, the specified information is automatically entered in the profile file. Default Settings in the Profile File In addition to the individual phone number configuration parameters, you can define default pa- rameters to be used when logging in with new phone numbers. The default parameters are con- figured with the administration tool optiClient Admin and are also saved in the profile file. If no default parameters are defined, you will need to configure the phone number’s parameters when you log in with that number for the first time. Central Access to the Profile File The profile file is saved on the user’s local PC by default. It could, however, also be saved in a directory that is accessable to all users. This would enable users to work from any workstation with the same phone number parameters, which only need to be configured once. The config- uration of the profile folder is also handled with the optiClient Admin administration tool. PC Performance As well as connection parameters and user parameters, various standard settings, for example, for PC performance and Client PC QoS (Quality of Service) are performed. These settings will be performed using the optiClient Admin tool, which is installed on the client PC. License information The current license number can be displayed in the optiClient Admin administration tool and can be updated with a new license number if required. Personal phone book The database with the personal telephone directory of a phone number is saved on the user’s local PC by default. This database could likewise be saved in a directory that is available to all users, thus enabling them to access their personal phone books from any workstation. The con- figuration of the database folder is also handled via the optiClient Admin administration tool. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 3-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 36. 3benkonf.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch First Steps and User Configuration Working with the Administration Tool 3.2 Working with the Administration Tool This section contains the following information: ● Configuring PC settings ● Configuring Setup information (License information) ● Configuring Parameters for PC Performance ● Configuring Parameters for Quality of Service General Starting the administration tool is only necessary when ● PC settings, e.g. – Default settings – Profile file path – Personal telephone directory path ● Licence specifications ● Parameters for PC performance need to changed. The administration tool optiClient Admin is included in the optiClient 130 in- stallation package. Starting the administration tool: Start the application optiClientAdmin.exe, which is located in the program directory of the optiClient 130 (the default directory is C:Program FilesSiemensoptiClient 130 V4Client). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 3-3
  • 37. 3benkonf.fm First Steps and User Configuration Nur für den internen Gebrauch Working with the Administration Tool 3.2.1 Configuring PC settings To configure the parameters for the PC settings, proceed as follows: 1. After starting the administration tool, select the PC settings tab. Display 2. The current folder where the ’local’ profile file is saved is displayed under Profile folder in the Path field. If the users always work at the same workstation, then it is not necessary to change the default directory shown in the example. If the users use their phone number on a number of different workstations, a network directory that is accessible from all worksta- tions must be specified. The profile file is saved in the specified directory under the name profile.cfg. 3. If users with new phone numbers should be able to change their phone number’s specified default settings individually, enable the option Allow individual setting changes on this PC with optiClient 130 V4. If this option is not enabled, the default settings for new phone numbers are used and cannot be changed by the user under the Option Settings. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 3-4 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 38. 3benkonf.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch First Steps and User Configuration Working with the Administration Tool 4. To edit the default settings, click on Change default in the profile folder. This opens the Default values dialog box in which you can configure the following default parameters: – General parameters (default) The parameters to be entered as default values here have the same significance as those under General parameters, which can be entered in the Advanced Options dia- log box (when logging in with a phone number). – Telephone directory parameters (default) The parameters to be entered as default values here have the same significance as those under Telephone Directory parameters, which can be entered in the Advanced Options dialog box (when logging in with a phone number). – Update parameters (default) The parameters to be entered as default values here have the same significance as those under Update parameters, which can be entered in the Advanced Options dialog box (when logging in with a phone number). – Server parameters (default) The parameters to be entered as default values here have the same significance as those under Server parameters, which can be entered in the Advanced Options dialog box (when logging in with a phone number). 5. Under Database folder in the Path field, enter the folder in which the personal phone book is to be created. If the users use their phone number on a number of different workstations, a directory that is accessible by all workstations must be specified here. In this directory, the personal phone book is created under the name TelBookxxxx.mdb, where xxxx is the phone number. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 3-5
  • 39. 3benkonf.fm First Steps and User Configuration Nur für den internen Gebrauch Working with the Administration Tool 3.2.2 Configuring Setup information (License information) To configure Setup information, proceed as follows: 1. If the license must be changed after installation, activate the Setup information tab in the administration tool. Display 2. The current License key is read out and displayed from the Windows registry. If a new li- cense is to be entered, enter this in the input field. Click Save to store the new license key immediately and directly in the Windows registry. You do not have to exit the dialog to do this. Click Reload to read the license key stored in the Windows registry and to display it in the input field. 3. Click OK or Cancel to exit the administration tool. The Save button must always be activated in the dialog to save a new license > key. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 3-6 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 40. 3benkonf.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch First Steps and User Configuration Working with the Administration Tool 3.2.3 Configuring Parameters for PC Performance To configure PC parameters, proceed as follows: 1. Activate the PC Performance tab in the administration tool: Display 2. The entries under Global settings for logged on user are global Windows settings which are valid for users logged on system-wide, i.e. outside optiClient 130 V4.0. ● Specify the Menu show delay in milliseconds. The default value is 400 ms. ● In the timer field below, enter the wait time (in seconds) which should elapse after the last user input before an application controlled in the foreground is actually brought to the top. This standard Windows timer is generally only used for applications that do not by default allow the foreground windows of other applications to run at the same time. The standard value is 200 s. ● Click Save to store your input immediately and directly in the Windows registry. ● Click Defaults to display Windows default settings. The values are displayed in the in- put fields. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 3-7
  • 41. 3benkonf.fm First Steps and User Configuration Nur für den internen Gebrauch Working with the Administration Tool 3. Click OK or Cancel to exit the administration tool. Press Save each time to store your input in the dialog. > A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 3-8 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 42. 3benkonf.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch First Steps and User Configuration Working with the Administration Tool 3.2.4 Configuring Parameters for Quality of Service Proceed as follows to configure parameters for Quality of Service: 1. Activate the Quality of Service tab in the Administration Tool. Display 2. Enter the global Windows settings for the current PC under Global settings for this PC. ● Use the Enable QoS under Windows 2000 option to activate or deactivate the option to use Quality of Service (QoS) under Windows 2000. This option must be activated for opti- mized voice quality which is also primarily dependent on the infrastructure in the network (see also section Configuring/installing Quality of Service). This option is irrelevant for operation under Windows XP because QoS is always available under Windows XP. ● Click Defaults to display the default values for HiPath networks. The values are displayed in the input fields. ● Click Save to save your entries immediately and directly to the Windows registry. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 3-9
  • 43. 3benkonf.fm First Steps and User Configuration Nur für den internen Gebrauch Working with the Administration Tool Layer 2: User Priority acc. to IEEE802.1p The values are entered in the three bits of the IEEE802.1p field for the "Call Signalling" and "Voice Payload" traffic types. Layer 3: Priority classes (Codepoint acc. to DiffServ) The values are entered in the six bits of the DiffServ Codepoint (DSCP) field in the Type of Service (TOS) byte for the "Call Signalling" and "Voice Payload" traffic types. 3. Under Settings for optiClient 130, activate or deactivate if optiClient data is intended for the "Call Signalling" and "Voice Payload" traffic types on the respective layer (Mark Layer 2 packages/Mark Layer 3 packages) with the values set above. 4. Click OK to quit the Administration Tool. You must always activate the Save button to save your entries in the dialog. > A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 3-10 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 44. 3benkonf.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch First Steps and User Configuration Starting the Program 3.3 Starting the Program General Following the installation, three versions of the optiClient 130 with three different user interfaces are available. If you are logging on with a phone number for the first time, either the default set- tings will be used (if configured), or you must supply the necessary information after the pro- gram starts. In addition to these settings there are also additional workstation-specific settings, which can be configured later (see section Option Settings for the optiClient phone or Option Settings for the optiClient office). Starting the Program You can start the program by: ● double-clicking one of the shortcuts on the desktop ● selecting Start - Programs - optiClient 130 V4 - optiClient office or optiClient phone or op- tiClient easyCom A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 3-11
  • 45. 3benkonf.fm First Steps and User Configuration Nur für den internen Gebrauch Logging on 3.4 Logging on On starting the program, the appropriate configuration data is loaded, and you are presented with the logon dialog: When logging on, enter the following data: Parameter Meaning Call number Client telephone number Password Appropriate password Language Select the language for the optiClient 130 user interface. Chose from the languages installed. Remote Access This option must be activated when Remote Access. The telephone number and the Password are assigned by a systems engineer when > configuring HiPath 3000/5000 V4.0. The Remote Access option must only be activated if optiClient is logged onto a HG1500. > Confirm your entries with OK. When the optiClient 130 is started for a phone number that is already known, the parame- ters saved for that phone number are read in from the profile file. When starting with a phone number that is unknown, either the default settings in the profile file are used (if available), or the settings must be configured immediately at logon by clicking on the Ad- vanced button (see also the section on Extended Options parameters for details). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 3-12 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 46. 3benkonf.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch First Steps and User Configuration Logging on 3.4.1 Logging on with a new telephone number When a user logs on with a new phone number without existing default values for the first time, the individual user and connection parameters for that number are not yet known. Consequent- ly, after the logon, a corresponding message is displayed to indicate that the system settings could not be found. You now have the following options: Display > If the IP address of the system at which the phone number is configured is known, select the option HiPath HG 1500 IP Address and enter the IP address of the HG 1500 of that system in the input field. > If a profile file containing the required connection and user parameters already exists, select the option Configuration File and enter the full path name of that file directly in the input field or click the Browse button ( ... ) and specify the appropriate folder / file name. > Click OK to confirm your selection. The logon is executed, and a connection to the system is established. Following a successful logon, the appropriate parameters for the phone number are copied to the (locally) saved profile file. A sample configuration file can be found in the folder miscprofile on the Instal- > lation CD. 3.4.2 Extended Options parameters Instead of loading the user parameters when you log on (for the first time), they can also be entered by clicking on Advanced in the logon dialog: A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 3-13
  • 47. 3benkonf.fm First Steps and User Configuration Nur für den internen Gebrauch Logging on – General parameters – Audio parameters – Telephone Directory parameters – Update parameters – Server parameters 3.4.2.1 General parameters 1. Select the General tab in the extended options dialog. Display (example for optiClient office) Enter the following parameters: Parameters Meaning Enable voice compres- These options reduce the data volume and thus the bandwidth sion during local opera- requirement on the line. They are automatically activated if the tion teleworking option was activated when logging on to the system. Suppress periodic con- trol message during lo- cal operation A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 3-14 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 48. 3benkonf.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch First Steps and User Configuration Logging on Support system feature If the parameter Support system feature "automatic line sei- "automatic line seizure" zure" was activated on the connected system, this parameter must be activated in optiClient office. This causes optiClient of- fice to behave as a normal telephone, i.e., the trunk access num- ber must be dialed for external numbers, and internal stations can be reached directly. The behavior of the optiClient phone is analogous to that of the system. The parameter Support system feature "automatic line seizure" need not be explicitly selected in the optiClient phone, since the optiClient phone behaves like an optiPoint ter- minal, which means that no trunk access code must be dialed for external numbers. Internal stations can be reached via the auto- matically generated internal key. In addition to lowering data volumes/bandwidth requirement across the line, ac- > tivated voice compression reduces voice transmission quality. This option must only be activated if optiClient is logged onto a HG1500. To check whether the network path and/or the communication server (HG1500) > is available, optiClient sends a control message every minute to which the com- munication server must respond. If this response message fails to appear, op- tiClient displays an advisory message and the display information is deleted. Every five minutes, optiClient tries to determine whether the network path and/ or communication server is available again by sending control messages. Once a response is received, the optiClient automatically logs on to the communicati- on server again. 2. You can now configure further parameters or click OK. This returns you to the Logon dialog. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 3-15
  • 49. 3benkonf.fm First Steps and User Configuration Nur für den internen Gebrauch Logging on 3.4.2.2 Audio parameters 1. Switch to the Audio tab in the extended options dialog. Display 2. Enter the following parameters: Parameters Meaning Handset Under Handset select the handset for the optiClient. All devices/ drivers installed are offered in the drop-down list. Mixer Components located on the PC/sound card for the Mixer. If this designation is identical to the designation of the Audio playback and Audio recording components, you must only carry out the selection here. The designation will be automatically as- signed to the other components. If the names for Mixer, Audio playback, and Audio recording are not identical, they must be selected individually. Please ensure that components from the same sound card are selected. Audio playback Components located on the PC/sound card for the Audio play- back. Ensure you enter a component from the same sound card in all three fields. Audio recording Components located on the PC/sound card for recording. En- sure you enter a component from the same sound card in all three fields. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 3-16 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 50. 3benkonf.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch First Steps and User Configuration Logging on Parameters Meaning Play back sounds only If the option is activated, sounds are output only via the PC via PC speaker (not via speaker. sound card) If this option is activated on a PC running under Windows 98SE, sounds are not signalled by a modulated tone but, depending on the operating system, by a default system beep. Play back sounds via This option can only be activated if the option Play back sounds sound card and PC via PC speaker is not activated. speaker When this option is activated, all sounds (e.g. alert characters for inbound calls) are played back via the sound card and the PC speaker. Tones, e.g. busy signals, are only played back via the sound card. To ensure proper functionality, it is important to note that if you are using the op- > tiPoint handset, you should select USB Audio Device as sound card compo- nents for Mixer, Audio playback, and Audio recording. Activating the options under Sounds is only useful if the PC has an internal > speaker available. 3. You can now configure further parameters or click on OK. This returns you to the Logon dialog. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 3-17
  • 51. 3benkonf.fm First Steps and User Configuration Nur für den internen Gebrauch Logging on 3.4.2.3 Telephone Directory parameters 1. Switch to the Telephone directory tab in the extended options dialog. Display 2. The parameters correspond to those which can also be used when setting the options in the optiClient (see Option Settings for the optiClient phone and Option Settings for the op- tiClient office). 3. You can now configure further parameters or click on OK. This returns you to the Logon dialog. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 3-18 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 52. 3benkonf.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch First Steps and User Configuration Logging on 3.4.2.4 Update parameters 1. Switch to the Update tab in the extended options dialog. Display 2. You can activate the Update Server here and specify the folder in which software updates are made available under the field Server share name on which update versions are stored. Whenever optiClient is started, this folder will then be checked to determine wheth- er a new software update exists. 3. If the parameter Search periodically for an updated version on the server is activated, the check for new software updates will also be performed when the system is running. 4. You can now configure further parameters or click on OK. This returns you to the Logon dialog. The set Update folder corresponds to the setup folder on the Installation CD (and > not the root folder on the CD). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 3-19
  • 53. 3benkonf.fm First Steps and User Configuration Nur für den internen Gebrauch Logging on 3.4.2.5 Server parameters 1. Switch to the Server tab in the extended options dialog. Display 2. Enter the following parameters: Parameter Meaning IP address IP address of the HG1500 where the user number is configured. 3. You can now configure further parameters or click on OK. This returns you to the Logon dialog. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 3-20 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 54. 3benkonf.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch First Steps and User Configuration Changing the User Password 3.5 Changing the User Password Every HiPath 3000 user can change his/her login password for the optiClient as follows: 1. Click on the menu key in optiClient phone or open the context menu in optiClient office. 2. Then select Change password. 3. Enter the old and the new password in the ensuing dialog. Enter the new password again to confirm it. If the old password is correct and the two new password entries are identical, the changes take effect immediately. In other words, if a client with the same extension were to log on from a teleworking station after the password has been changed, for example, the new password would apply. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 3-21
  • 55. 3benkonf.fm First Steps and User Configuration Nur für den internen Gebrauch Exiting optiClient phone / office / easyCom 3.6 Exiting optiClient phone / office / easyCom ● You can exit optiClient office by clicking on the menu bar and selecting the Exit command from the menu. ● You can exit optiClient phone and optiClient easyCom as usual in Windows by clicking the Close button in the upper right corner of the user interface. A note appears while the optiClient phone / office / easyCom is closing. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 3-22 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 56. 4bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient phone User Interface 4 optiClient phone User Interface ● The optiClient phone user interface simulates the optiPoint advance plus phone and gen- erally functions in the same way as such a telephone. Consequently, only the PC-specific operations and features are described in this document. This section contains the following information: – Layout of the optiClient phone User Interface – General Operation – Information on the optiClient phone – Manual Update Check for the optiClient phone – Option Settings for the optiClient phone – View Settings for the optiClient phone – Online Help It is not possible to use different user interfaces simultaneously! > A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 4-1
  • 57. 4bof.fm optiClient phone User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Layout of the optiClient phone User Interface 4.1 Layout of the optiClient phone User Interface Minimize optiClient phone window optiClient phone Close window Display Key module Phone book key (De-)Activate Loudspeaker key Call list key Microphon key Menu key Headset key Fixed function keys Programmable function keys Keypad Confirm function Browse functions Accept a call (Answer) Terminating Calls (Ending Calls) Overview of the optiClient phone user interface elements: Element Meaning Minimize window Minimize optiClient Close window Exit optiClient phone Display When the system is idle, the date, time, and personal telephone number are displayed. When functions are activated, function- specific information is displayed here. Activate/deactivate key Open/close the configured key module, see Key Modules. module Speaker key Speaker volume control Microphone key Microphone volume control Headset key Activate/deactivate the headset (if it is available). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 4-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 58. 4bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient phone User Interface Layout of the optiClient phone User Interface Element Meaning Phone book key Opens the phone book manager, see Electronic Telephone Direc- tory. Call list key Opens the call list manager, see Call List Management. Menu key Opens the optiClient phone menu. Function key 1 Preset with "Service Menu" Function key 2 Preset with "Redial" Function key 3 Preset with "Microphone" or changes to "internal" in the case of automatic line seizure. Function key 4 Preset with "Speaker" The first time you log in with a new telephone number, the text of the function keys > is preset and stored as it was set when the system was logged into. When logging in with the same telephone number and with other languages, text is not reloaded. Changes, for example, in text in a different language are then only manually possi- ble. Elements of the user interface that are not covered here, e.g., digits or function keys, corre- spond to those from the optiPoint and can be looked up in its operating instructions. Minimizing / Restoring optiClient phone as an icon in the Taskbar If you temporarily do not need the user interface of the optiClient phone, you can reduce the program to an icon in the system tray of the taskbar (next to the time/date display): ● You can minimize the optiClient phone by choosing the Minimize command from the sys- tem menu. optiClient phone in the system tray of the taskbar To restore the optiClient phone user interface double-click the optiClient icon in the system tray or its button on the taskbar. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 4-3
  • 59. 4bof.fm optiClient phone User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Operation 4.2 General Operation General Information ● To press a button in the optiClient phone user interface, simply click the key with your mouse. ● Generally, input is possible through the keys in the optiClient phone user interface and the PC keyboard. ● The function of the Minimize and Close buttons in the upper section of the user interface correspond with the Windows standard. ● You can move phone numbers from other applications to the display window of the optiCli- ent phone by using a drag and drop operation (see also Extended Dialing Functions Using Drag & Drop). ● The optiClient phone user interface can be moved around the desktop like a normal win- dow. This section contains the following information: – Using the PC keyboard – Setting the speaker and microphone volume – Headset – Telephone Directory Management – Call lists – Key Modules – Key Captions – Accepting / Terminating a Call A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 4-4 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 60. 4bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient phone User Interface General Operation 4.2.1 Using the PC keyboard The following applies when using optiClient with the PC keyboard: Procedure Key/key combination Accept call s End call (hang up) _ Scroll functions X or Z Confirm function = Volume control + or - on the dial pad Dial directly from the clipboard; a dial prefix is not < + + added to the clipboard contents. Dial directly from the clipboard; the dial prefix set Ì + v for the location is automatically inserted first (see also Configuring Location Information). 4.2.2 Setting the speaker and microphone volume Setting the speaker volume Key Procedure The speaker key is used for speaker volume control. You can change the speaker volume during an active call by clicking on the "+" or "-" symbol, respectively. The optiClient phone changes the volume accordingly and also shows the setting in the display. Setting the microphone volume Key Procedure The speaker key is used for microphone volume control. You can change the microphone volume during an active call by clicking on the "+" or "-" symbol, respectively. The optiClient phone changes the volume accordingly and also shows the setting in the display. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 4-5
  • 61. 4bof.fm optiClient phone User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Operation 4.2.3 Special Tone Settings Besides the speaker and microphone volumes, you can also change the "ring volume", "ring tone" and the "attention ring volume". You can make these settings when you are not conduc- ting a call. Key Procedure Click on the "+" or "-" symbol of the speaker key.The following appears on the display: Telephone Settings Ring volume? You can use the arrow keys that appear in the display to scroll between the tone settings for the ring volume, ring tone or the attention ring volume. To confirm your selection, click the confirmation key (check mark) in the display You can then click on the "+" or "-" symbol of the speaker key again to change the corresponding setting. The current setting is saved on clicking the confirmation key. 4.2.4 Headset Activating / Deactivating the headset Key Procedure Click on the headset key to activate/deactivate a headset. The headset key informs you whether the headset is active (connector closed) or inactive (connector open). If no headset has been configured for use with the optiClient, the headset key will > not appear. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 4-6 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 62. 4bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient phone User Interface General Operation 4.2.5 Telephone Directory Management Opening Telephone Directory Management Key Procedure To open telephone directory management, click on the Phone Book key. A detailed description of telephone directory management can be found in the sec- tion Electronic Telephone Directory. 4.2.6 Call lists Opening Call List Management Key Procedure To open call list management, click on the Call List key. The following call lists are managed by the optiClient: ● Lost calls ● Received calls ● Extensions not reached ● Extensions reached ● Conducted calls A detailed description of phone book management can be found in the Call List Management section. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 4-7
  • 63. 4bof.fm optiClient phone User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Operation 4.2.7 Key Modules As with the optiphone, 1 to 4 key modules, each with 16 freely-programmable keys, can be add- ed to the basic module of the optiClient phone. ● To open the key module click on the Activate button: ● To close the key module click on the Activate button again: The maximum number of key modules possible per user can be set up in the user > configuration. HiPath 3750 and HiPath 3550 allow100 key modules per system; Hi- Path 3350 / HiPath 3250 / HiPath 3150 allow 30 key modules per system. The key modules of the optiClient phone are counted as key module extensions for the opti- Point. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 4-8 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 64. 4bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient phone User Interface General Operation 4.2.8 Key Captions You can label the keys in the main module and in all key modules in any way you want: Step Procedure 1 Double-click the caption field on the key. ● In the dialog that appears, you will see the current caption for the key and a sec- ond field, in which you can enter the desired (new) caption. 2 Click OK to confirm. ● The key caption on the third preprogrammed function key is labelled Micro- > ● phone on/off. If automatic line seizure is configured, the "Initiate Internal Call" function is pro- grammed on this key. In this case, you need to manually change the key caption to Internal Calls. ● When programming keys that are initiated with *91 by default, the correspond- ing phone number / key function entry appears in a line of the display. You can apply the text in the display to the key caption. To do this, open the context menu for the key that you wish to add a caption to and select Captions from 1st dis- play line. ● In the case of a phone number entry, only the phone number will be applied as a caption by default. If you wish to assign the displayed name as a caption in- stead of the phone number, hold down the < key during the operation. 4.2.9 Accepting / Terminating a Call Key Description To answer a call, click the Accept a call key or the s key on the PC keyboard. To terminate a call, click the End Call key or the _ key on the PC keyboard. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 4-9
  • 65. 4bof.fm optiClient phone User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Information on the optiClient phone 4.3 Information on the optiClient phone You can obtain further information regarding version, copyright, connected hardware, personal phone number, etc. in the following manner: Step Procedure 1 Click the menu key. The optiClient phone menu appears. 2 Select Information... ● The Info dialog appears: A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 4-10 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 66. 4bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient phone User Interface Manual Update Check for the optiClient phone 4.4 Manual Update Check for the optiClient phone In addition to the automatic update function, which checks for new update versions of the op- tiClient 130 about every 15 minutes, the optiClient 130 can also be updated manually. Step Procedure 1 Click the menu key. ● The optiClient phone menu appears. 2 Select Update... ● The optiClient 130 checks if a new version of the program is available on the update server for installation. No new program version available... 3 ● If no new program version is available on the update server, a corresponding message appears. If no update server has been configured, an error message appears. The update server is set up in the user configuration. New program version available... 3 ● If a new program version is available on the update server, the following dialog appears: 4 Choose one of the available options: ● On immediate installation, the optiClient is first closed, and the update version is then installed. The optiClient phone must then be restarted manually. ● If you delay the update until the next logon, the periodic update will be deferred to the next time you log on and will no longer performed during the current ses- sion. ● If you choose the final option, the update version will not be installed. The peri- odic update check, if configured, is deactivated. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 4-11
  • 67. 4bof.fm optiClient phone User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Manual Update Check for the optiClient phone Step Procedure 5 If you select Cancel, the update version will not be installed. The current settings for periodic update checks remain unchanged. After setting up the desired options, confirm your selection with OK. Local administration rights are required for manual (or automatic) optiClient update. > A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 4-12 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 68. 4bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient phone User Interface Option Settings for the optiClient phone 4.5 Option Settings for the optiClient phone General Information To ensure proper functionality of the optiClient 130, you need to configure various user-specific parameters. Step Procedure 1 Click the menu key. ● The optiClient phone menu appears. 2 Select Options... ● The Options dialog appears. You may configure the following parameters: – General Options – Display Options – Telephone Directory Options – Telephony Options A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 4-13
  • 69. 4bof.fm optiClient phone User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Option Settings for the optiClient phone 4.5.1 General Options Set the maximum number of key modules possible for the current user in the General tab. Ac- ceptable entries are from 0 to 4. Display The maximum possible number of key modules depends on the connected > HiPath system (see also section General Operation). If the logged-on user has al- ready opened the maximum number of key modules, they cannot activate any more; the key modules are inactive (gray) even if the individually-configured maximum number for the user has not yet been reached. After the number of user key modules has been reduced, the modules already used > once can be completely removed only in HiPath 3000 Manager E. The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog click on OK. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 4-14 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 70. 4bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient phone User Interface Option Settings for the optiClient phone 4.5.2 Display Options Under the Display mode tab you can activate/deactivate the following options: Display > Phone always on top The optiClient phone user interface always remains in the foreground. > Move phone to top on incoming call If the user interface is not set up to always be on top (i.e. in the foreground), you can configure the user interface here to have it brought to the foreground on receiving incoming calls. The option to move the optiClient phone to the top under Windows 98SE / 2000 / XP > depends on the currently running application, which may prevent this from occurring (see also information on setting PC parameters in the section Working with the Ad- ministration Tool). > Maximize phone on incoming call If this option is enabled, the user interface is restored from its minimised state on the taskbar and displayed in the foreground on receiving an incoming call. > Hide phone on minimized status The optiClient phone is always reduced to the system tray; it can also be reduced to the taskbar if the corresponding option is enabled. Key modules that are detached from the user interface are not minimized > A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 4-15
  • 71. 4bof.fm optiClient phone User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Option Settings for the optiClient phone > Minimize phone after a period of time Activate this option if the user interface should be minimized after a specified amount of time. This should be entered as a number of minutes. Use the Hide phone on minimized status option to decide whether the user interface is to be minimised in the system tray or on the taskbar. The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog click on OK. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 4-16 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 72. 4bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient phone User Interface Option Settings for the optiClient phone 4.5.3 Telephone Directory Options Under the Telephone directory tab you can edit the following parameters: Display > If you are working with a telephone directory server (LDAP), activate this option. Then enter the IP address or Name of the LDAP server. > In order to access and display the desired LDAP entries in optiClient, a number of settings need to be made. To do this, click on LDAP extensions (see also the section on Telephone Directory Options - LDAP Settings). If no LDAP telephone directory server is available, users can only use their personal phone books. > The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog, click on OK. 4.5.3.1 Telephone Directory Options - LDAP Settings Apart from the name and IP address of the LDAP server, you will also need to configure some parameters for Extended LDAP Settings if a central LDAP directory is to be used in the opti- Client phone. > To configure these settings, select the Telephone dir. tab in the Options dialog (see also Option Settings for the optiClient phone) and then click on the LDAP extensions button. A dialog box to configure the LDAP settings appears. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 4-17
  • 73. 4bof.fm optiClient phone User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Option Settings for the optiClient phone Display The complete LDAP directory is stored in a hierarchical structure. In some cases, only a subsection of this directory structure may be appropriate for individual users as the base directory name (Base DN) to be searched and displayed. In addition, you will also need to specify under which field names of the LDAP directory the details expected in the optiClient 130 are stored on the LDAP server. > In the Base DN field you define a certain base directory name as the root LDAP directory of the optiClient, i.e., the starting point from which entries can be searched and dispolayed. This entry can be optionally made in two formats: – <Level_desig.3>=<Name>, <Level_desig.2>=<Name>, <Level_desig.1>=<Name> – or <Level_desig.1>=<Name>/<Level_desig.2>=<Name>/<Level_desig.3>=<Name> A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 4-18 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 74. 4bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient phone User Interface Option Settings for the optiClient phone The examples below apply to an LDAP directory with the following elements: > – Level designation 1: c (e.g., for "country") – Name of an entry at this level: DE – Level designation 2: o (e.g., for "organization“) – Name of an entry at this level: SIEMENS – Level designation 3: ou (e.g., for "organization unit“) – Name of an entry at this level: ICN To define these details as the base directory name in optiClient, the following entries must be made in the Base DN field: – ou=ICN, o=SIEMENS, c=DE – or alternatively: c=DE/o=SIEMENS/ou=ICN If no restricted base directory is specified for the search here, the entire LDAP directory is used as the the base directory. > In order to correctly map the LDAP entries in the optiClient, the field names of the LDAP directory to be displayed in the column information of the optiClient must be entered under LDAP field names. The Name and First name fields are mandatory and must be filled with corresponding field names in the LDAP directory. The level designations, the names of entries within the levels of an LDAP direc- > tory, and the field names in the directory can be obtained from the administrator of the LDAP server / directory. > Click on OK to save your entries. This returns you to the Options dialog. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 4-19
  • 75. 4bof.fm optiClient phone User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Option Settings for the optiClient phone 4.5.4 Telephony Options Under the Telephony tab you can edit the following parameters: Display > If the phone numbers of incoming calls are to be transferred to an external application, activate the External Interface option and enter the directory / name of the external application. A typical example of this feature would be searching for customer data in a database. The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog click on OK. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 4-20 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 76. 4bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient phone User Interface View Settings for the optiClient phone 4.6 View Settings for the optiClient phone You can choose one of the three available views for the optiClient phone as follows: Step Procedure 1 Click the menu key. ● The optiClient phone menu appears. 2 Select View. You now have the following options: ● Normal view: The user interface is fully displayed with the dial pad and the function keys. ● Without dial pad The user interface is displayed with the function keys, but without the dial pad. ● Without dial pad and function keys The user interface is displayed without the dial pad or the function keys. The view of the key modules remains unchanged, regardless of the settings select- ed here. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 4-21
  • 77. 4bof.fm optiClient phone User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Online Help 4.7 Online Help To start the online help for the optiClient phone, proceed as follows: Step Procedure 1 Click the menu key. ● The optiClient phone menu appears. 2 Select Help. The online help is started. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 4-22 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 78. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface Layout of the optiClient office User Interface 5 optiClient office User Interface The optiClient office graphical user interface (GUI) consists of a system bar with several (tabbed) dialogs, from which certain functions can be chosen, options can be selected and the status of current calls can be determined. 5.1 Layout of the optiClient office User Interface The optiClient office user interface has the following layout: Close optiClient office Close window Window bar Minimize Telephone directory / Call list/ Dial Window Connecting parties window Functions window A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-1
  • 79. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Layout of the optiClient office User Interface Overview of the available Windows: Window Description Functions / Telephone direc- ● Functions: tory / Caller- and call records Settings for available phone number functions. The func- tions actually available will depend on the phone number configuration on the HiPath system and may differ from the range of functions depicted here. ● Telephone directory: Managing the Telephone Directory (see also section Elec- tronic Telephone Directory). ● Caller- and call records (see also section Call List Manage- ment) for: – Lost calls – Received calls – Extensions not reached – Extensions reached – Conducted calls Speed-dialing keys Configuration and display of freely-definable speed-dial keys Connection parties ● Display of current calls and conversations ● Function icon can be initiated via the various call functions. ● Current client status display as well as input request and function display. ● Activate/deactivate keys and the keys for speaker, micro- phone and headset (if available) volume control. ● ACD status display A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 80. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface General Operation 5.2 General Operation ● The Office bar can be moved around the desktop along with any attached windows. ● Open windows can be closed by clicking the Close Window button. ● Open windows can be removed from the bar and individually moved and positioned on the desktop. ● You can change the size of the individual windows. If you have inadvertently made a window too large or moved it to a position in > which some parts of the window are no longer visible, you can make the window visible again by double-clicking in the title bar. ● You can move phone numbers from other applications to the display window of the optiCli- ent office via a drag and drop operation (see also Extended Dialing Functions per Drag & Drop). ● A maximum of 4 windows are available for Speed-dial keys / Dialing. One of these windows can be moved to the side of the desktop and then be positioned as a bar for speed dialing keys. This section contains information on: – Opening and Closing Windows – Minimizing optiClient office – Changing your Code Key (PIN) – Setting the speaker and microphone volume – Headset – Telephone Directory Management – Call List Management – Programming the Function Keys A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-3
  • 81. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Operation 5.2.1 Opening and Closing Windows Step Procedure 1 Open the optiClient office context menu: ● All available windows are listed in the upper panel of the optiClient office menu. 2 By selecting / removing the check mark in front of an entry, you can open / close the corresponding window. In addition to the window for displaying connection parties and the window for functions, the telephone directory and caller- and call records, you can open a maximum of four windows for dialing and speed-dialing. The dial window can be positioned anywhere on the desktop, including outside the optiClient toolbar. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-4 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 82. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface General Operation 5.2.2 Minimizing optiClient office If you temporarily do not need the user interface of the optiClient office, you can reduce the pro- gram to an icon in the system tray of the taskbar (next to the time/date display): optiClient office in the status area of the taskbar To minimize the optiClient user interface, proceed as follows: ● Choose the command Minimize from the context menu or the system menu of the Office bar. ● or select the menu item Minimize in the Office toolbar system menu. ● or click on the reduce button in the title bar of the window Connection Parties. To restore the optiClient office user interface, double-click the optiClient office icon in the system tray or its icon on the taskbar. 5.2.3 Changing your Code Key (PIN) You can change the code key for your phone number as follows: Step Procedure 1 Open the optiClient office context menu: 2 Select the command Change code key... 3 A small display appears. To change your code, enter your old 5-digit code and click the Confirm key. When prompted, enter the new security code, click the Confirm key, and enter the code a second time for confirmation. The security code is changed, and the display window is closed. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-5
  • 83. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Operation 5.2.4 Setting the speaker and microphone volume Setting the speaker volume Key Procedure The speaker key in the Connection Parties window is used to control the volume of the speaker. To increase or decrease the volume, click on the the "+" or "-" symbol, respectively. optiClient changes the volume accordingly and also shows the setting in the display. Setting the microphone volume Key Procedure The microphone key in the Connection Parties window is used to control the volume of the microphone. You can change the microphone volume during an active call by clicking on the "+" or "-" symbol, respectively. optiClient changes the volume accordingly and also shows the setting in the display. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-6 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 84. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface General Operation 5.2.5 Special Tone Settings Besides the speaker and microphone volumes, you can also change the "ring volume", "ring tone" and the "attention ring volume". You can make these settings when you are not conduct- ing a call. Key Procedure Click on the "+" or "-" symbol of the speaker key in the Connection Parties window. The following appears on the display: Telephone Settings Ring volume? > You can use the arrow keys that appear in the display to scroll between the tone settings for the ring volume, ring tone or the attention ring volume. To confirm your selection, click the confirmation key (check mark) in the display. > You can then click on the "+" or "-" symbol of the speaker key again to change the corresponding setting. The current setting is saved on clicking the confirmation key. 5.2.6 Headset Key Description To activate/deactivate a headset, click on the headset key in the Connection Parties window. The headset key informs you whether the headset is active (connector closed) or inactive (connector open). ● The decision to make a call via the headset or handset can only be made in the > idle state (i.e., before initiating the call), since the headset key can only be op- erated when no call is active. ● If no headset has been configured for use with the optiClient, the headset key does not function. ● When a headset is connected, the volume control does not control the speaker/ microphone, but rather the headset volume. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-7
  • 85. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Operation 5.2.7 Telephone Directory Management To open Telephone Directory management, click on the Telephone directory tab in the Func- tions/Telephone directory/Caller- and call records window. You can find a detailed description of the optiClient phone book in section Electronic Telephone Directory. 5.2.8 Call List Management Call lists for the following types of calls are available for the optiClient 130 ● Lost calls ● Received calls ● Extensions not reached ● Extensions reached ● Calls made To open Call List Management, click on the Caller- and call records tab in the Functions/ Telephone directory/Caller- and call records window. A detailed description of the optiClient call list management can be found in section Call List Management. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-8 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 86. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface General Operation 5.2.9 Programming the Function Keys The function keys B to L on the keyboard can be programmed with specific functions for the optiClient. The A function key is programmed for Help, and cannot be changed. To program the function keys, proceed as follows: Step Procedure 1 Open the optiClient office context menu: 2 Choose the command Program Function Keys... ● The current function key assignments appear: 3 To assign or change a function key, click on the desired function key in the window: A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-9
  • 87. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Operation Step Procedure 4 Choose the desired function from the list box. You have a choice of the following functions: ● Microphone off ● Suppress caller ID ● Night service ● Do not disturb feature ● Call waiting without tone ● Hunting group ● Do Not Disturb feature ● Answer text ● Call Forwarding ● Code key ● ACD Logon ● ACD not available ● ACD post-processing ● ACD destination ● Accept a parked call and the setting for no assignment ● No function programmed You can find more information on these functions in section Using the optiClient of- fice. 5 Press OK to confirm your selection. The function key will now initiate the selected function in the optiClient. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-10 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 88. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface Information on the optiClient office 5.3 Information on the optiClient office You can obtain further information regarding version, copyright, connected hardware, personal phone number, etc., as follows: Step Procedure 1 Open the optiClient office context menu: 2 Select Information... ● The Info dialog appears: A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-11
  • 89. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Manual Update Check for optiClient office 5.4 Manual Update Check for optiClient office In addition to the automatic update function, which checks for new update versions of the opti- Client about every 15 minutes, the optiClient 130 can also be updated manually. Step Procedure 1 Open the optiClient office context menu: 2 Select Update... ● The optiClient 130 checks if a new version of the program is available on the update server for installation. No new program version available... 3 ● If no new program version is available on the update server, a corresponding message appears. If no update server has been configured, an error message appears. The update server is set up in the user configuration. New program version available... 3 ● If a new program version is available on the update server, the following dialog appears: 4 Choose one of the available options: ● On immediate installation, the optiClient is first closed, and the update version is then installed. The optiClient office must then be restarted manually. ● If you delay the update until the next logon, the periodic update will be deferred to the next time you log on and will no longer performed during the current ses- sion. ● If you choose the final option, the update version will not be installed. The peri- odic update check, if configured, is deactivated. 5 If you select Cancel, the update version will not be installed. The current settings for periodic update checks remain unchanged. After setting up the desired options, confirm your selection with OK. Local administration rights are required for manual/automatic optiClient update. > A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-12 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 90. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface Option Settings for the optiClient office 5.5 Option Settings for the optiClient office General Information To ensure proper functionality of the optiClient 130, you need to configure various user-specific parameters. Although the necessary parameters for connecting to the switch were defined the first time the program was started, they can be edited here in addition to the general user pa- rameters. > Open the optiClient office context menu and choose Options... > or Click on the Options icon in the launchpad. You can set the following options: – General Options – Display Options – Telephone directory options – Telephone directory options - LDAP Settings A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-13
  • 91. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Option Settings for the optiClient office 5.5.1 General Options Under the General tab you can define the following options: Display ● Activate the corresponding option if you want the ACD status to be displayed in the Con- nection Parties window. The appropriate colors are then displayed, depending on the ACD status. ● You can define the width of speed-dial keys in pixels in the Speed-dial keys window. The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog click on OK. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-14 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 92. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface Option Settings for the optiClient office 5.5.2 Display Options Under the Display mode tab you can activate/deactivate the following options: Display > Phone always on top The optiClient phone user interface always remains in the foreground. > Move phone to top on incoming call If the user interface is not set up to always be on top (i.e. in the foreground), you can configure the user interface here to have it brought to the foreground on receiving incoming calls. The option to move the optiClient office to the top under Windows 98SE / 2000 > / XP depends on the currently running application, which may prevent this from occurring (see also information on setting PC parameters in the section Working with the Administration Tool). > Maximize phone on incoming call If this option is enabled, the user interface is restored from its minimised state on the taskbar and displayed in the foreground on receiving an incoming call. > Hide phone on minimized status The optiClient phone is always reduced to the system tray; it can also be reduced to the taskbar if the corresponding option is enabled. > Minimize phone after a period of time Activate this option if the user interface should be minimized after a specified amount of time. This should be entered as a number of minutes. Use the Hide phone on minimized status option to decide whether the user interface is to be minimised in the system tray or on the taskbar. The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog click on OK. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-15
  • 93. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Option Settings for the optiClient office 5.5.3 Telephone directory options Under the Telephone directory tab you can edit the following parameters: Display > If you are working with a telephone directory server (LDAP), activate this option. Then enter the IP address or Name of the LDAP server. > In order to access and display the desired LDAP entries in optiClient, a number of settings need to be made. To do this, click on LDAP extensions (see also the section on Telephone directory options - LDAP Settings). If no LDAP telephone directory server is available, users can only use their personal phone books. > The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog, click on OK. 5.5.3.1 Telephone directory options - LDAP Settings Apart from the name and IP address of the LDAP server, you will also need to configure some parameters for Extended LDAP Settings if a central LDAP directory is to be used in optiClient office. > To configure these settings, select the Telephone dir. tab in the Options dialog (see also Option Settings for the optiClient office) and then click on the LDAP extensions button. A dialog box to configure the LDAP settings appears. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-16 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 94. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface Option Settings for the optiClient office Display The complete LDAP directory is stored in a hierarchical structure. In some cases, only a subsection of this directory structure may be appropriate for individual users as the base directory name (Base DN) to be searched and displayed. In addition, you will also need to specify under which field names of the LDAP directory the details expected in the optiClient 130 are stored on the LDAP server. > In the Base DN field you define a certain base directory name as the root LDAP directory of the optiClient, i.e., the starting point from which entries can be searched and dispolayed. This entry can be optionally made in two formats: – <Level_desig.3>=<Name>, <Level_desig.2>=<Name>, <Level_desig.1>=<Name> or – <Level_desig.1>=<Name>/<Level_desig.2>=<Name>/<Level_desig.3>=<Name> A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-17
  • 95. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Option Settings for the optiClient office The examples below apply to an LDAP directory with the following elements: > – Level designation 1: c (e.g., for "country") – Name of an entry at this level: DE – Level designation 2: o (e.g., for "organization“) – Name of an entry at this level: SIEMENS – Level designation 3: ou (e.g., for "organization unit“) – Name of an entry at this level: ICN To define these details as the base directory name in optiClient, the following en- tries must be made in the Base DN field: – ou=ICN, o=SIEMENS, c=DE – or alternatively: c=DE/o=SIEMENS/ou=ICN If no restricted base directory is specified for the search here, the entire LDAP directory is used as the the base directory. > In order to correctly map the LDAP entries in the optiClient, the field names of the LDAP directory to be displayed in the column information of the optiClient must be entered under LDAP field names. The Name and First name fields are mandatory and must be filled with corresponding field names in the LDAP directory. The level designations, the names of entries within the levels of an LDAP direc- > tory, and the field names in the directory can be obtained from the administrator of the LDAP server / directory. > Click on OK to save your entries. This returns you to the Options dialog. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-18 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 96. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface Option Settings for the optiClient office 5.5.4 Telephony Options Under the Telephony tab you can edit the following parameters: > If the phone numbers of incoming calls are to be transferred to an external application, activate the External Interface option and enter the directory / name of the external application. A typical example of this feature would be searching for customer data in a database. The parameters in other tabs can now be changed. To save the settings and to exit the dialog click on OK. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-19
  • 97. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Option Settings for the optiClient office 5.5.5 Speed-dial Keys You can call defined speed-dial numbers directly via speed-dial keys. The speed-dial keys are located in the Speed-dial keys/Dial windows (max. four). Open the window in which you want to configure the speed-dial keys, and select the Speed-dial keys tab. A maximum of 218 speed-dial keys can be configured for each user. A dial window can be deleted, moved or docked from the optiClient office toolbar by dragging the mouse over the upper/lower/right/left edge of the desktop. View for dialing the speed-dial keys The speed-dial keys can be displayed in the old view with the handset symbols or in the new view with the heads/bright dots and arrows. > To select the desired view, open the context menu of the Dial window and select Layout V.4 for the speed dial icons of Version 4.0 or Layout V.2 for the speed dial icons of Version 2.0. Speed-dial Key Icons For internal speed-dial numbers administered at the system at which the opticlient is logged on, the current status of the corresponding speed-dial extensions is displayed with the handset icon. There is no icon for speed-dial keys with external extensions: Symbol Symbol Meaning Version 2 Version 4 The party’s extension is idle. (for internal speed-dial numbers only) The party’s extension is busy. (for internal speed-dial numbers only) The party is receiving a call. (In this state, the call from another caller can be answered.) (for internal speed-dial numbers only) Adding a New Speed-Dial Key Step Procedure 1 Open the context menu of the Speed-dial keys window and select Add Entry... A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-20 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 98. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface Option Settings for the optiClient office Step Procedure 2 In the following dialog, enter the key captions and the corresponding phone number (internal or external). Press the OK dialog key to confirm your selection. 3 The speed-dial keys are displayed in the window. Changing the Caption or Phone Number of a Speed-Dial Key Step Procedure 1 Open the context menu of the speed-dial key that you wish to change, and select Change data.... 2 In the dialog that follows, change the caption or phone number (internal or external) and save your changes by clicking OK. Deleting a Speed-Dial Key Step Procedure 1 Open the context menu of the speed-dial key that you wish to change and select De- lete entered data. 2 Confirm your selection by clicking OK. The speed-dial key is deleted, and you return to the Speed-dial key window. You can skip confirming your selection on deletion by holding down the < key > while selecting the entry from the context menu. Sorting Speed-dial Keys in the Speed-dial Key Window Step Procedure 1 Open the context menu in the speed-dial keys window. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-21
  • 99. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Option Settings for the optiClient office Step Procedure 2 You have the following options for sorting: – by name (speed-dialing key caption) – by the type of phone number (internal or external) stored on the speed-dial key You can optionally sort in either – ascending or – descending order. Select the desired option by clicking on it; a check mark means the option has been selected. Dialing via a Speed-Dial Key ● Double-click on the speed-dial key or ● Open the context menu of the desired speed-dial key and select Dial.... A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-22 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 100. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface Functions 5.6 Functions General Information As a user, a number of general and special telephony functions are available for your personal phone number, which correspond with the configuration of the HiPath system. General telephony functions These functions can be activated in the Functions/Telephone directory/Call detail records window. Display Function options Function toolbar A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-23
  • 101. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Functions The following options are available by selecting the corresponding check box. Function Icon/ Option ● Microphone off Option (see section Microphone on/off) ● Suppress caller ID Option (see Caller ID Suppression) ● Do not disturb feature Option (see Ringer Off) ● Call waiting without tone Option (see Call Waiting) ● Hunting group Option (see Hunting Group) ● Do not disturb feature Option (see Do Not Disturb Feature) ● Answer text Option (see Answer Text) ● Call forwarding Option (see Call Forwarding) ● Code key Option (see Telephone Lock) ● ACD logon Option (see ACD Logon (Logging on to System)) ● ACD not available Option (see ACD Unavailability) ● ACD post-processing Option (see ACD Post-Processing) ● ACD Night extension Option (see ACD Night Service) ● Function keys... (see section Programming the Function Keys) ● Reset functions (see section Resetting Functions) ● Options and Settings (see section Option Settings for the optiClient office) A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-24 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 102. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface Functions The functions identified with "Option" depend on the feature set enabled for the indi- > vidual users and may therefore not be available in some cases. The following special telephone functions are available via the Connection Parties Window: See also Connection Parties Window. Function Icon ● Accept a parked call... (see section Parking Calls) ● Display received infos... (see section Infos). Only enabled if info was received ● Send Info... (see section Infos) ● Display sent messages...(see section Infos) Only enabled if messages have been sent ● Callback orders... (see section Callback) ● Telephone data service (see section Telephone Data Service) ● Call and call list management (see section Call List Management) ● Phone book management (see section Electronic Telephone Directory) ● Call pickup group (see section Call Pickup). Only enabled on incoming calls to the pickup group ● Help (see section Online Help) A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-25
  • 103. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Connection Parties Window 5.7 Connection Parties Window Open dial area Display bar Buttons for loudspeaker, Display of the current microphone, and headset. call status of the tele- Also used for browsing phone number and to confirm functions Active bar ACD status Function icon Display of connection charges Available function buttons Function icons Layout of the Connection Parties window Element Meaning Display line ● In idle mode: Display of personal telephone number, date, and time. ● To activate functions: Display/query of function-specific information. ● Use as dial window. Keys for speaker, micro- ● In normal mode: phone, and headset as For speaker and microphone volume control and to activate/ well as to scroll and con- deactivate the configured headset. firm functions. ● In operating mode: To scroll and confirm functions. Active bar Displays the corresponding connection status of the connected HiPath system as "active" or "inactive". ACD status Current ACD status of the telephone number displayed with both text and color. Functions key(s) The type, amount, and function are dependent on the status of the current call. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-26 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 104. 42bof.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient office User Interface Connection Parties Window Element Meaning Function icons Start the respective functions Dialing area The dialing area can be used here to open the dialing functions. Call status display As in the example: a current call (orange) with a called party Function icon To quickly display an incoming call (answer) and end a call (hang up). Call costs displayed Only for external calls Dialing functions Click on the arrow on the list in the Connection Parties window display: ● Enter the phone number or select one from the recently dialed number list. ● To call the party, double click the phone number entry. To access the party directly, click the direct access function key. The call status is displayed on the call status display. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 5-27
  • 105. 42bof.fm optiClient office User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch Online Help 5.7.1 Call status display The call status of an incoming, outgoing or active call is displayed in the connection window via entries of various colors: Call status display / Meaning function icon Outgoing call (green) Incoming call (red/orange) Active call (orange) Active conference call (orange) (example: personal phone number plus two additional parties) Call on hold (grey) Functions in the connection status window The available telephone functions and their use in optiClient office (accepting calls, placing calls, conferencing, etc.) is described in the section Using the optiClient office. 5.8 Online Help To start the online help for the optiClient office, proceed as follows: Step Procedure 1 Open the optiClient office context menu. 2 Select Help. The online help is started. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 5-28 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 106. BofEasyCom.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch optiClient easyCom User Interface 6 optiClient easyCom User Interface General The optiClient easyCom user interface basically offers the same functionality as the optiClient office and optiClient phone user interfaces. It is not possible to use different user interfaces simulteanously. For information to the following topics please refer to: ● User Interface Design ● Presentation Conventions ● Screen Style ● Call Field ● Keypad Field ● Journal ● Send Digits and Privacy Buttons See also: Personal Preferences A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 6-1
  • 107. BofEasyCom.fm optiClient easyCom User Interface Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 6-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 108. 5phone.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient phone Extended Dialing Functions Using Drag & Drop 7 Using the optiClient phone 7.1 Extended Dialing Functions Using Drag & Drop In addition to the possibilities for calling a number that have already been covered in this man- ual, you can insert a phone number from another application (e.g., a customer management application) into the optiClient phone display via a simple Drag & Drop operation. The phone number is called automatically. If the HiPath system is not configured to allow an automatic dial prefix, hold down the Ìkey while performing the drag and drop operation. On dialling the phone number, the prefix needed to access an outside line for your location is then automatically read from the Windows Control Panel (Telephone and Modem Options) (cf. section Configuring Location Information). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 7-1
  • 109. 5phone.fm Using the optiClient phone Nur für den internen Gebrauch Basic and advanced functions 7.2 Basic and advanced functions For details on the basic and advanced functions identified with “*” below, please refer to the Op- erating Instructions of the optiset E or to section Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alpha- betical Order), since these functions are the same as for the optiPoint. 1. Making and Answering Calls 6. Call Forwarding * Answering Calls * Call Forwarding * Call Pickup * Night Service * Do Not Disturb 7. Using Other Functions * Ringer Off * Call Charge Display * Mute/Mute off * Busy Signaling for Speed-dial Keys 2. Making calls * Code key * Caller-ID Suppression * Infos (extension suppression) * Initiate Call * Answer text * Ending Calls * Telephone Data Service 3. Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneous- * DTMF Transmission ly (Changing over to DTMF Tone Dialing) * Consultation hold * Hunting groups * Conference * Resetting Functions * Toggle 8. ACD Functions * Call Transfer * ACD Logon * Hold * ACD Post-Processing * Parking Calls * ACD Unavailability 4. Making Calls to Stored Destinations * ACD Night Service * Redial 9. Telephone directory (see Electronic Telephone Directory) * Caller List 10. Call Lists (see Call List Management) Executive/Secretary Functions 5. If You Cannot Reach a Destination... * Callback * Call Waiting A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 7-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 110. 5phone.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient phone Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order) 7.3 Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order) The table below lists all available functions as they appear on the display. Functions that have been configured (contact System Support) can be activated interactively (select + save) via the Service menu (select + save or enter a code) or via function keys. Functions ... Interac- ... Via the Program/ ... With (display) tively Service menu function Program/Service keys Code Account code *60 X Advisory msg. on *69 X Advisory msg. off #69 X Associated dial *67 X Associated serv. *83 X Call waiting *55 X Waiting tone off *87 X Waiting tone on #87 X Call wait.term.on *490 X Call wait.trm.off #490 X Caller List #82 X Save number *82 X Changeover on *66 X Changeover off #66 X Change PIN *93 Conference *3 X Start conference Adding a party to the conference End conference #3 View conf parties Remove party Drop last conf. party *491 (only for U.S. with Centrex functionality) Consult Return to held call *0 Quit and return *0 Transfer/US:Accept call UK:Accept Control Relay On *90 X Control Relay Off #90 X US:Directory UK:Phonebook X DISA Internal DISA *47 X En-bloc sending Dial A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 7-3
  • 111. 5phone.fm Using the optiClient phone Nur für den internen Gebrauch Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order) Functions ... Interac- ... Via the Program/ ... With (display) tively Service menu function Program/Service keys Code DND on *97 X DND off #97 X Door opener on *89 X Door opener off #89 X DTMF dialing *53 X Forwarding on *1 X 1=all calls *11 X 2=external calls only *12 X 3=internal calls only *13 X Forwarding off #1 X Trunk FWD on *64 X Trunk FWD out #64 X Forward Line: On *501 X Forward Line: Off #501 X Headset Answer call HF answerback on *96 X HF answerback off #96 X Hotline Join hunt group *85 X Leave hunt group #85 X Rejoin all groups *85* X Leave all groups #85# X Lock all phones *943 X Monitoring *944 Mute on *52 X Mute off #52 X Night answer on *44 X Night answer off #44 X Open door *61 X Override *62 X Page *45 X Answer page (not for U.S.) #45 X Park a call *56 X Retrieve call #56 Phone Test *940 Pickup - directed *59 X Pickup - group *57 X Accept call A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 7-4 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 112. 5phone.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient phone Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order) Functions ... Interac- ... Via the Program/ ... With (display) tively Service menu function Program/Service keys Code Prog. feature key *91 X Redial X Reject call Release X Relocate station log off *9419 log on #9419 Reserve trunk X Reset services #0 X Retrieve line *63 X Ring Transfer: On *502 X Ring Transfer: Off #502 X Ringer cutoff on *98 X Ringer cutoff off #98 X Ringing group on *81 X Ringing group off #81 X Room monitor *88 X Select language *48 Send message *68 X View sent message #68 X US: View messages UK: Display Messages #68 X Mailbox X Shift Key X Show call charges (own telephone) *65 X View call charges (other party’s telephone) X Speaker call *80 X Suppress call ID *86 X Restore caller ID #86 X Tel. data service *42 Temporary MSN (not for U.S.) *41 X Temporary Phone *508 X Timed reminder on *46 X Timed reminder off #46 X Toggle/Connect *2 X Trace call *84 X Transfer Trunk Flash *51 X A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 7-5
  • 113. 5phone.fm Using the optiClient phone Nur für den internen Gebrauch Overview of Functions and Codes (in Alphabetical Order) Functions ... Interac- ... Via the Program/ ... With (display) tively Service menu function Program/Service keys Code UCD Log on *401 X Log off #401 X Available *402 X Not available #402 X Work on *403 X Work off #403 X UCD night on *404 X UCD night off #404 X Calls in queue *405 X US:Callback UK:Set Callback *58 X View callbacks/Delete #58 Use speed-dialing *7 X Change Speed-dial (station) *92 X A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 7-6 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 114. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Making and Answering Calls 8 Using the optiClient office 8.1 Making and Answering Calls The following features are available when making and answering calls: > Answering Calls > Call Pickup > Do Not Disturb Feature > Ringer Off > Microphone on/off 8.1.1 Answering Calls The phone uses a specific ringer signal when it rings. Step Action/Effect 1 The incoming call is displayed flashing red/orange under the phone number / name entry in the Connection Parties window. 2 The following options are available for accepting a call: – Click on the flashing call-status display – Click on the arrow next to the call-status display – Click the Accept Call button – From the context menu, choose the Accept Call command. 8.1.2 Call Pickup Directed call pickup (only possible with speed-dialing) Step Action/Effect 1 If an internal number that you have stored stored on a speed dial key is called by a third party, you see the call icon on that speed dial key. 2 For directed call pickup, click on the speed-dial key of the called party. Call Pickup in a Call Pickup Group You can pick up calls for telephones within a call pickup group from your telephone. This is also possible during a call. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-1
  • 115. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Making and Answering Calls Step Action/Effect 1 A party within the pickup group receives a call. The call pickup icon is activated (blue) in the Connection parties window. 2 Click on the call pickup icon to pick up the call. You can pick up calls for all parties that are assigned to your call pickup group. Call > pickup groups are defined by a service technician. 8.1.3 Do Not Disturb Feature You can temporarily block incoming calls when required by your situation while still being able to initiate calls. Callers hear a busy signal. Activating do not disturb > To activate the Do not Disturb feature, enable the Functions tab in the Functions/ Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Do Not Disturb check box. A check mark will appear. Deactivating do not disturb > To deactivate the Do not Disturb feature, enable the Functions tab in the Functions/ Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Do Not Disturb check box. The check mark is removed, and you can accept calls again. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 116. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Making and Answering Calls 8.1.4 Ringer Off If you do not wish to be disturbed by calls, you can temporarily disable the ringer tone for in- coming calls. All calls will be announced with a short beep and also displayed on the screen. Activating ringer off > To activate the Ringer Off function, enable the Functions tab in the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Ringer Off check box. A check mark will appear. Activating ringer on > To deactivate the Ringer Off function, enable the Functions tab in the Functions/ Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Ringer Off check box. The check mark will disappear, and incoming calls are again announced with a ringing tone. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-3
  • 117. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Making and Answering Calls 8.1.5 Microphone on/off You have the option of activating or deactivating the handset microphone or speakerphone dur- ing a call. Turning on the Microphone (Mute off) > To turn on the microphone – click the microphone icon in the Connection parties window. The microphone is en- abled and a green dot appears in the icon. or – activate the Functions tab in the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Microphone off option field. A check mark is set. Turning off the Microphone (Mute) > To turn off the microphone – click the microphone icon in the Connection parties window. The microphone is en- abled and the green dot in the icon disappears. or – activate the Functions tab in the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Microphone off option field. The check mark is remo- ved and caller ID is enabled. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-4 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 118. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Making calls 8.2 Making calls 8.2.1 Caller ID Suppression When you place an external call, you can prevent your internal phone number or name from being displayed on the called party’s terminal. This feature remains activated until you deacti- vate it. The caller ID suppression function must be activated in the HiPath system and en- > abled by the network provider. Activating caller ID suppression > To activate the caller ID suppression function, enable the Functions tab in the Functions/ Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Suppress extension check box. A check mark will appear. Deactivating caller ID suppression > To deactivate the caller ID suppression function, enable the Functions tab in the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window and click the Suppress extension check box. The check mark will be removed, and caller ID is enabled. 8.2.2 Initiating Calls Dialing a party To call an internal party or a group of internal parties (hunting group), simply dial the appropri- ate station number. Step Action/Effect If a speed dial key has been defined for the party: 1 > Click on the speed-dial key (on the name) or > Select Dial from the context menu of the speed dial key. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-5
  • 119. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Making calls Step Action/Effect Dialing from the Connection parties window (dial area): 2 Enter the number you wish to call or select it from the list box. Display 3 Click the Confirm button to confirm Dialing from the Connection parties window (context menu): 1 Open the context menu in the Connection Parties window and select Dial. > Enter the desired Call number or select it from the list box. Display > Click OK. 2 If you want to access the party directly, enable the option Speaker call. Confirm your selection with OK. Call signaling 1 The outgoing call is flagged as outgoing with a green indicator in the Connection Parties window. 2 As soon as the receiving party picks up, the active call is displayed in orange. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-6 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 120. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Making calls When calling external parties, it is often necessary - depending on the PBX config- > uration - to dial a so-called dial prefix, e.g. "0“, before the actual number or to record this prefix when defining the speed-dial key. 8.2.3 Extended Dialing Functions per Drag & Drop Apart from the described options for calling a number, you can also insert a phone number from another application (e.g., a customer management application) into the optiClient office Dial window via a simple Drag & Drop operation. The phone number is called automatically. If the HiPath System is not configured to allow direct access to an external line, hold down the Ì k ey while performing the drag and drop operation. On dialling the phone number, the prefix needed to access an outside line for your location is then automatically read from the Windows Control Panel (Telephone and Modem Options) (cf. Section 2.3, “Configuring Locati- on Information”). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-7
  • 121. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Making calls 8.2.4 Terminating Calls The remote party ends the call The active call displayed in the Connection Parties window disappears. You end the call You can end a call by one of the following methods: > Click the function icon "Handset on-hook“ (red handset) for the active (orange) call in the Connection Parties window. > Click on End call in the Connection Parties window. > Select End call from the context menu of the active call. > Press the _ key. The active call displayed in the Connection Parties window disappears. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-8 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 122. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously 8.3 Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously 8.3.1 Consultation Hold You are conducting a call and would like to consult a colleague without allowing the current par- ty to listen in. Initiating a Consultation Call Step Action/Effect Variant 1 1 From the context menu of the first party, click Consultation hold. 2 The call is placed on hold, and the call status display turns grey. 3 Dial the second party. 4 The call status display of the second call appears green when dialing and changes to orange as soon as the called party answers (active call). Variant 2 1 You call a second party while still talking to the first. 2 The call is automatically placed on hold, and the call status display turns grey. 3 The second party is called simultaneously (outgoing call). The call status display switches to green when dialing and changes to orange as soon as the called party answers (active call). Ending a consultation call Step Action/Effect 1 You end the (active) consultation call. 2 The party with which you conducted a consultation call is disconnected, and you are automatically returned to the call on hold, which now becomes the active call (orange). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-9
  • 123. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously 8.3.2 Conferencing During an internal or external call, you can call up to four internal or external stations, add them to the call, and thus conduct a conference call. Initiating a Conference Step Action/Effect 1 During a call, you initiate a consultation call with another party with whom you want to conduct a conference call. 2 As soon as the called party accepts the call, the call status display turns orange. 3 Select Start conference with from the context menu of the call on hold. 4 As the first party in the conference, you (who were originally on hold) now conduct a conference call with the second party. Your two conversation partners are depicted as a conference call with an orange call-status display. Expanding a Conference Step Action/Effect 1 During a conference call, you initiate a consultation call with the next party in the conference. 2 As soon as the called party accepts the call, the call status display turns orange. 3 Select Start conference with from the context menu of the conference call. 4 You, the previous conference parties, and the new party now conduct a conference call. All conversation partners are depicted as a conference call with an orangecall- status display. Connecting Conference Parties Step Action/Effect 1 During a conference call, select the entry Connect partner from the context menu of the conference call. 2 You thus leave the conference, while the remaining parties stay connected. The call is removed from the display in the Connection Parties window. End Conference Step Action/Effect 1 During a conference call, select the entry End conference from the context menu of the conference call. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-10 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 124. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously 8.3.3 Toggle You can toggle between two calls and alternately speak with both parties. The waiting party cannot listen in on your conversation. Both parties can be either external or internal parties. You also have the option of disconnecting from both calls and connecting the two parties to one another (Call Transfer). Alternatively, you can also initiate a conference (Conferencing). Step Action/Effect 1 You are currently conducting a call. 2 You now conduct a consultation call with another party. 3 To switch between the two parties (active / held), you can: > select Toggle from the context menu of the respective party on hold. > click the Toggle button. 4 The active call and thus the call-status display changes to reflect your choices. 8.3.4 Call Transfer If the party you are currently speaking to would like to speak to another party, you can call that party and transfer the call via a screened or unscreened transfer. Step Action/Effect 1 During a call you conduct a consultation with the party to which you want to transfer the active call. 2 Before or after the selected party responds, open the context menu in the call-status display of the consultation call and select Transfer call. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-11
  • 125. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously 8.3.5 Parking Calls You can park up to ten calls, either internal, external, or both. Parked connections can be picked up at other stations. This feature is useful if you want to continue a call at another phone. Parking a Call Step Action/Effect 1 During an active call, select Park call... from the context menu. 2 Enter a free line number for the call in the dialog that follows and then click OK to confirm your selection: Line numbers 0 to 9 are available for this purpose. 2 The call is parked. Retrieving a Parked Call Step Action/Effect 1 To retrieve a parked call, click on the Park icon in the toolbar of the Connec- tion parties window or > Open the context menu in the Connection Parties window and select Back from park status. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-12 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 126. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Calling Multiple Parties Simultaneously Step Action/Effect 2 Enter the line number on which the call is parked in the dialog that follows and then click OK to confirm your selection: A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-13
  • 127. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Making Calls to Stored Destinations 8.4 Making Calls to Stored Destinations 8.4.1 Redial The last ten phone numbers dialed are automatically saved in a single dialing list. To dial one of these saved phone numbers, proceed as follows: Step Procedure Redialing via the Dial area: 1 Open the Dial area in the Connection Parties window, select the number you wish to call from the listbox, and click the icon of the Confirm button. Redialing via the Connection Parties window: 1 Open the context menu in the Connection Parties window and select Dial. Select the desired phone number from the list box and then click on OK. Redialing the last number: 1 Open the context menu in the Connection Parties window and select Redial. Instead of selecting the number to be redialed manually, you can also redial numbers > from the caller and call records (e.g. parties not reached or busy) of the optiClient. 8.4.2 Call Lists A convenient Call List function has been implemented in the optiClient office. The following calls are automatically included in the Call List management: ● Missed calls ● Received calls ● Extensions not reached ● Extensions reached ● Calls made To open Call List management, click on the Caller- and call records tab in the Functions/ Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. A detailed description of the optiClient call list management can be found in section Call List Management. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-14 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 128. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office If You Cannot Reach a Destination... 8.5 If You Cannot Reach a Destination... 8.5.1 Callback If a user is busy or is not answering, you can store an automatic callback. This feature saves you from having to make repeated attempts to reach the user. The system/party calls you ● when both you and the busy station are free ● or when the station that did not answer has conducted another call. You can save up to five callback requests. Before your saved callback requests have been ex- ecuted, you can display them and delete them as desired. Callback calls are repeated until a connection is made or the callback call is canceled. A phone or PC can initiate up to five callbacks and be the destination of up to five callback requests. Ad- ditional callbacks are rejected. Depending on the dialed station, some callback requests may be rejected. > Initiating Callback Orders From the context menu, point to and then click Consultation hold. Displaying/Deleting Callback Orders You can display or delete your callback orders as follows: Step Action/Effect 1 Click the Callback orders icon in the Connection parties window. 2 The information in the display area (Connection Parties window) guides you through the process of viewing or deleting callback orders in the same manner as when using an optiPoint phone. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-15
  • 129. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch If You Cannot Reach a Destination... 8.5.2 Call Waiting Even when you are conducting a call, you can still be reached by other callers. During a call, you are notified that another call is waiting both acoustically (alerting tone) and visually and can answer this call. Disabling the Call Waiting Tone > To deactivate the Call Waiting feature, click the Call waiting without tone check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. The check mark is set. Enabling the Call Waiting Tone > To activate the call waiting tone, click the Call waiting without tone check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. The check mark is removed, and you can hear the tone again. ● Automatic call waiting can be configured on the system level. > ● ● You can only be the recipient of such calls. There is no way to actively get through to other busy stations (call waiting). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-16 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 130. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Call Forwarding 8.6 Call Forwarding 8.6.1 Call Forwarding You can forward internal and/or external calls to various internal or external telephones (desti- nations). External destinations are also possible, depending on system configuration. You have the option of forwarding ● all calls ● only external calls or ● only internal calls. Enabling Call Forwarding Step Action/Effect 1 To turn on call forwarding, click the Call forwarding check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. 2 In the dialog that follows, select the Call type for which the forwarding applies and enter a Call forwarding destination. Click OK to confirm your selection. 3 Call forwarding is activated, a check mark is placed before the function option, and the activated call forwarding is displayed with the call forwarding target in the ACD status field of the Connection Parties window: Disabling Call Forwarding > To disable the call forwarding function, click the Call forwarding check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. The check mark and the display in the Connection Parties window are removed, and call forwarding is disabled. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-17
  • 131. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Call Forwarding 8.6.2 Night Service In night answer mode (for example, outside office hours), all external calls are immediately for- warded to a specific internal telephone (night destination). Activating Night Service Step Action/Effect 1 To activate the Night Service function, click the Night service check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. Deactivating Night Service Step Action/Effect 1 To disable the Night Service function, click the Night service check box in the Func- tions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. The check mark is removed, and the night service is disabled. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-18 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 132. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Using Other Functions 8.7 Using Other Functions 8.7.1 Displaying Call Charges The connection charges for an external call are automatically shown in the call-status display of the Connection Parties window. The display of call charge information depends on the network provider. > 8.7.2 Telephone Lock You can protect your phone against unauthorized access (and protect your personal data) by entering a 5-digit personal code. Enabling a Phone Lock Step Action/Effect 1 To enable the phone lock, click the Code key check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. 2 A dialog to lock the phone appears: 3 Enter the 5-digit code number and then click OK. 4 A check mark is set in the function option. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-19
  • 133. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using Other Functions Disabling a Phone Lock Step Action/Effect 1 To disable the phone lock, click the Code key check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. 2 A dialog to release the lock appears. 3 To release the lock, enter the code number and then click OK. 4 The check mark n the function option is removed. > For more details on changing codes, see the section Telephone Lock. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-20 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 134. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Using Other Functions 8.7.3 Infos Sending Infos Step Action/Effect 1 Click the Send Info icon on the Functions tab in the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. or select the entry Send Info... from the context menu in the Connection Parties window. 2 As with the optiPoint phone, you are now requested to enter the Call number of the recipient and to select the Info. Confirm your entries with OK. You will receive a confirmation when the Info is sent. In a calling state, messages are directly sent to the called parties. The call number > is already filled in, and the corresponding field is greyed out. Reading Infos Step Action/Effect 1 As soon as you receive an info, the Read Infos sent icon turns blue (active) on the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. Click this icon to view the message. 2 The sent info appears in the display that follows. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-21
  • 135. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using Other Functions Displaying Infos sent Step Action/Effect 1 As soon as you receive an info, the Read Infos sent icon turns blue (active) on the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. Click this icon to view the message. 2 The sent info appears in the display that follows. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-22 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 136. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Using Other Functions 8.7.4 Answer Text If you have configured an answer text, the text you configured is automatically transmitted to an internal caller. Configuring Answer Text Step Action/Effect 1 To select and activate an answer text, click the check box Answer text in the Func- tions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. 2 The dialog to select / edit the answer text appears: 3 Select the desired answer text or edit the text by adding your own details and click OK to confirm your selection. 4 A check mark is set in the function option. Disabling an Answer Text Step Action/Effect 1 To disable the set answer text, click the check box Answer text on the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. 2 The check mark disappears, and the answer text is no longer shown to callers. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-23
  • 137. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using Other Functions 8.7.5 Telephone Data Service If you want to enter TDS codes that can be read and processed from other attached applica- tions, proceed as follows: Step Action/Effect 1 Click the "TDS" symbol in the Connection Parties window. 2 You can then enter the TDS codes in the screen that follows. 8.7.6 DTMF Suffix Dialing For special applications (for example, for data services), DTMF signals (DTMF tones) are re- quired while conducting a call (tone dialing). Enabling DTMF suffix dialing Step Action/Effect 1 From the context menu in the Connection Parties window, select DTMF suffix-di- aling... 2 A dialog in which you can enter the DTMF signals appears: 3 Click OK to confirm your selection and send the DTMF signals. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-24 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 138. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office Using Other Functions 8.7.7 Hunting Group A group of stations can be interconnected in a hunting group; this means that in addition to their respective phone numbers, these stations also have a shared phone number for the hunting group. Incoming calls are signaled consecutively at all the extensions in the hunting group until one of them answers the call. The caller always hears the ringing tone. The call is switched to the first telephone that becomes available in the hunting group. Each member of the group remains available under his or her own station number. All config- ured functions such as call forwarding, for example, apply both to the individual phone number and to the group member. Hunting groups are configured by the service technician. If you want to register your extension in the configured hunting group, proceed as follows: Activating a Hunting Group Step Action/Effect 1 Click the Hunting group check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Tele- phone Directory/Call detail records window. 2 A check mark is set in the function option, and your extension is now added to the hunting group. Deactivating a Hunting Group Step Action/Effect 1 Click the Hunting group check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Tele- phone Directory/Call detail records window. 2 The check mark is removed in the function option, and your extension is now re- moved from the hunting group. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-25
  • 139. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using Other Functions 8.7.8 Resetting Functions There is a general reset procedure for activated functions. All enabled functions (such as ringer cutoff, call forwarding and answer text) are reset (depending on the configuration of the tele- phone system). Step Action/Effect 1 Click the Reset functions icon in the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window. 2 The functions are reset in accordance with the settings on the phone system. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-26 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 140. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office ACD Functions 8.8 ACD Functions The ACD (Automatic Call Distribution) feature serves to distribute calls within a team. An in- coming call is always assigned to the team member (agent) who has had the longest break without a call. The team members can also work in different locations, e.g. at the company and on a home workstation. The teams (call distribution groups) and team members (agents) are defined by the service technician. The current ACD status is displayed in the Connection Parties window in the form of a separate button with different labels and colors, depending on the ACD status. ● The station is not logged on (grey) ● The station is logged on (bright green) ● The station is in the wrap-up phase (dark green) ● The station is not available (dark blue) The code of the person responsible appears in parentheses after the text. Furthermore, the call forwarding destination is indicated in text form on this button. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-27
  • 141. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch ACD Functions 8.8.1 ACD Logon (Logging on to System) At the start of service, you must log on to the system. Step Action/Effect 1 To complete the ACD logon, click > the ACD Logon check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window or > the entry Logon in the context menu of the Connection parties window. 2 A dialog in which you can enter the code for the person responsible appears. Click OK to confirm your selection. 3 The ACD status in the Connection Parties window changes to bright green (logged on). Your Processor ID for logging on to ACD is not the same as your phone number. > It is configured and assigned to you by the service technician. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-28 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 142. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office ACD Functions 8.8.2 ACD Logoff (Logging off from the System) At the end of service, you must log off from the system. Step Action/Effect 1 To complete the ACD logoff, click > the ACD Logoff check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/Telephone Directory/Call detail records window or > the entry Logoff in the context menu of the Connection parties window. 2 The logoff is performed; the check mark before the function option is removed, and the ACD status in the Connection Parties window changes to grey (logged off). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-29
  • 143. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch ACD Functions 8.8.3 ACD Post-Processing If you need more time in addition to the time actually spent conducting a call, you can request/ activate a wrap-up time for the last call. The wrap-up time can be enabled only if you are logged on. You must deactivate the wrap-up time yourself and report back to the system. If autoworking is activated in the system, the wrap-up time is automatically set after > each call and then deleted. Enabling post-processing Step Action/Effect 1 To enable ACD post-processing, click > the ACD post-processing check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/ Telephone Directory/Call detail records window or > the entry ACD post-processing in the context menu of the Connection parties window. 2 The check mark before the function option is set, and the ACD status in the Connec- tion Parties window changes to dark green (wrap-up). Disabling Post-processing Step Action/Effect 1 To disable ACD post-processing, click > the ACD post-processing check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/ Telephone Directory/Call detail records window or > the entry ACD post-processing in the context menu of the Connection parties window. 2 The check mark before the function option is removed, and the ACD status in the Connection Parties window changes to bright green (logged on). A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-30 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 144. 6office.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Using the optiClient office ACD Functions 8.8.4 ACD Unavailability During working hours, you can log on and log off from the system, e.g., to take a break (tem- porary logon/logoff). Activating Unavailability Step Action/Effect 1 To enable ACD unavailability, click > the ACD not available check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/ Telephone Directory/Call detail records window or > the entry ACD not available in the context menu of the Connection parties window. 2 The check mark before the function option is set, and the ACD status in the Connec- tion Parties window changes to dark blue (not available). Disabling Unavailability Step Action/Effect 1 To disable ACD unavailability, click > the ACD not available check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/ Telephone Directory/Call detail records window or > the entry ACD not available in the context menu of the Connection parties window. 2 The check mark before the function option is removed, and the ACD status in the Connection Parties window changes to bright green (logged on). If an agent does not answer a waiting call, the system switches automatically to Un- > available. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 8-31
  • 145. 6office.fm Using the optiClient office Nur für den internen Gebrauch ACD Functions 8.8.5 Displaying the Number of Waiting Calls Step Action/Effect 1 Select Number of Calls Waiting from the context menu of the ACD button in the Connection Parties window. 2 The ACD button briefly shows the number of waiting calls - regardless of the current ACD status. 8.8.6 ACD Night Service ACD night service is a separate night service for ACD that is not affected by system night an- swer. All incoming calls are forwarded to a special ACD destination. Activating Night Service Step Action/Effect 1 To activate the ACD Night service, click > the ACD Night extension check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/ Telephone Directory/Call detail records window or > the entry ACD Night extension in the context menu of the Connection parties window. 2 The check mark before the function option is set. Deactivating the Night Service Step Action/Effect 1 To deactivate the ACD Night service, click > the ACD Night extension check box in the Functions tab of the Functions/ Telephone Directory/Call detail records window or > the entry ACD Night extension in the context menu of the Connection parties window. 2 The check mark before the function option is removed. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 8-32 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 146. 7telefonb.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Electronic Telephone Directory 9 Electronic Telephone Directory The optiClient 130 offers you - if available and configured - a central LDAP telephone directory and a personal telephone directory. Whereas the central telephone directory (if any) is main- tained by your administrator, you can customize the private directory to meet your own needs. The telephone directory is available with identical functionality in both optiClient office and the optiClient 130 phone. There are only a few differences in the controls. This description uses the Telephone directory screens of the optiClient phone. Starting Telephone Directory Management You can start managing your phone books as follows: in optiClient office: Select the Telephone directory tab in the Functions / Telephone directory / Caller- and call records window. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 9-1
  • 147. 7telefonb.fm Electronic Telephone Directory Nur für den internen Gebrauch in optiClient phone: Click the Telephone directory button. The telephone directory is opened near the optiClient phone window. The width of the optiClient phone telephone book display can be altered. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 9-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 148. 7telefonb.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Electronic Telephone Directory General Functions 9.1 General Functions 9.1.1 Selecting the Telephone Directory General Information If available and configured, a central telephone directory (LDAP directory) as well as a personal directory are available to each user. You can select the desired phone directory from the Ad- dress / Telephone directory list box in the Phone Book management function. – optiClient office: You can select the desired phone directory from the Address / Telephone directory list box in the Phone Book management function. – optiClient phone: Click the LDAP icon in Phone Book Management. By clicking on the telephone book key or the call list key in the optiClient phone, it is > possible to directly switch between the two directories. LDAP Telephone Directory On selecting the LDAP telephone directory, this directory initially appears empty. You can go to the desired position of the directory by entering the name to be located or a part thereof in the input field and then clicking Search. This takes you to the first entry in the LDAP directory that matches your search criteria. The total number of entries found is displayed in the table header. Ensure that the maximum number of entries returned per search request is set by > the LDAP server administrator, as sometimes not all search results are displayed. If this is the case, the search criteria should be narrowed further. You can also search for parts of a last or first name in the LDAP directory. For exam- > ple, you could enter "smi h" to search for all entries that have a last name beginning with Smi and a first name beginning with H, respectively (no distinction between up- percase and lowercase is made here) A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 9-3
  • 149. 7telefonb.fm Electronic Telephone Directory Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Functions 9.1.2 Viewing Options of the Telephone Directory The telephone directory is structured like a standard Windows table and can be edited accord- ingly with respect to the column views. You can: > Arrange the columns in the desired display order by dragging and dropping > Change the column widths by moving the column separators > Sort a column (in ascending or descending order) and thus the entire telephone directory by clicking the column header A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 9-4 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 150. 7telefonb.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Electronic Telephone Directory General Functions 9.1.3 Edit entries in the directory Entries in the central LDAP directory can only be maintained centrally by the Administrator. In- dividual users can maintain their own personal directories. Copying an Entry from the LDAP directory to the Personal Telephone Directory To copy an entry from the LDAP directory to your own personal telephone directory, proceed as follows: 1. Locate the appropriate entry in the LDAP directory. 2. Select the menu item Add to personal tel. directory from the context menu. 3. The entry will be copied to your personal telephone directory and can then be edited further from there. Adding a New Entry to the Telephone Directory 1. Open the context menu from any free area of the telephone directory and select New... Display 2. Enter the last name, address, contact numbers and e-mail address of the party. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 9-5
  • 151. 7telefonb.fm Electronic Telephone Directory Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Functions Number Verification > When you enter a phone number in an empty field (Telephone 1, Telephone 2 (Fax) and Telephone 3 (Mobile)) for the first time or double-click in a field containing data, a verification window to check the phone details appears: The phone number you entered is split into its individual components - to the extent that this can be logically derived - and displayed in the Country/Region, City/Area Code and Local Number fields. Correct these details if required and confirm your changes by click- ing OK. This returns you to the dialog to edit the telephone directory entry. Note that the dialing will not work properly unless you enter the phone number in > canonical format, i.e., in the form +xx (yyyy) zzzz, where: ● +xx is the international dialing prefix without the leading zeros, ● (yyyy) is the local area code in parentheses and is separated from the international di- aling prefix by a space, The leading zero for the local area code (if relevant) can be entered. ● zzzz is the local number and is separated from the local area code by a space. ● Example for Germany: +49 (02302) 667-9876 You may enter the number in the fields directly in this format or separate the compo- nents by spaces, which automatically causes the canonical notation to be used. 3. You can also add your own notes on the contact by clicking the Notes button: A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 9-6 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 152. 7telefonb.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Electronic Telephone Directory General Functions Display Save your notes by clicking OK. You will be returned to the Telephone directory dialog (step 2). 4. Click OK to save these details. The new entry will now have been added to the personal telephone directory. Editing a Telephone Directory Entry If you want to edit an entry from your personal telephone directory, proceed as follows: 1. Open the context menu of the entry and choose Edit... 2. The dialog to edit the telephone directory entry appears. Edit the details as required. The verification dialog for phone numbers can be opened by double-clicking any phone number field. 3. Click OK to save these details. The edited entry will be copied to your personal telephone directory. Deleting a Telephone Directory Entry To delete a telephone directory entry, proceed as follows: A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 9-7
  • 153. 7telefonb.fm Electronic Telephone Directory Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Functions 1. Open the context menu of the entry to be deleted and choose Delete. 2. A confirmation prompt appears, which you can then acknowledge by clicking Yes. The en- try is deleted, and you return to the Telephone directory. 9.1.4 Finding a Contact in the Telephone Directory Finding an Entry by Name To start a simple search by name, enter the name you are looking for in the Last Name field. With each entered character, the display of the contacts in the telephone directory jumps to the first entry that corresponds to the one to be found. You can search for parts of a last and first name using an LDAP directory. You could enter "smi h" to search for all entries that have a last name beginning with Smi and a first name beginning with H respectively (no distinction between uppercase and lowercase is made here). Finding an Entry using Search Criteria Such searches can only be performed in the personal telephone directory. 1. Open the context menu of an entry in the telephone directory and select Search. 2. A dialog box with empty search fields appears. These fields match the fields of the entry in the telephone directory. You can now enter your search criteria in the individual fields. The wildcard characters "*" and "?" may also be used here. Click OK to confirm your search criteria. 3. The results of the search are displayed in the form of a telephone directory with the suffix (Search results) shown in the title. You can then switch back to the display of the complete telephone directory by selecting Display all from the context menu of the search results. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 9-8 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 154. 7telefonb.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Electronic Telephone Directory General Functions 9.1.5 Calling a Contact from the Telephone Directory You can call any of the contacts listed in your telephone directory as follows: 1. Open the context menu of the party to be called from the telephone directory. 2. Click the Dial button. The party is called. or From the context menu of the party, select Dial and then choose one of the phone numbers entered for that party (Telephone 1, Telephone 2 or Telephone 3) from the submenu. The selected phone number of the party is called. 9.1.6 Sending an E-mail to a Contact To send an e-mail to a contact listed in the telephone directory, proceed as follows: 1. Open the context menu of the relevant contact from the telephone directory. 2. From the context menu of the party, select Send e-mail... The e-mail application installed on your PC (e.g. Microsoft Outlook) is started with the input window for a new e-mail. The address of the recipient is automatically copied over from the telephone directory. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 9-9
  • 155. 7telefonb.fm Electronic Telephone Directory Nur für den internen Gebrauch General Functions A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 9-10 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 156. 8ruflisten.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Call List Management 10 Call List Management Call list management is only available, if the optiClient 130 V4 TAPI Service Provider > has been correctly initialized on the client PC. In the event of an error, a message appears, the call list key disappears from the optiClient telephone user interface and no entries are saved in call list management. The optiClient 130 offers you a convenient Call List management feature that enables various call lists to be retrieved: > Missed calls > Received calls > Extensions not reached > Extensions reached > Calls made (= received calls + extensions reached) Call list management is available with identical functionality in both the optiClient office as well as the optiClient phone. There are only a few differences in the layout. To start Call List Management in the optiClient phone: Click the Call Lists button. By clicking on the telephone book key or the call list key in the optiClient phone, it is > possible to directly switch between the two directories. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 10-1
  • 157. 8ruflisten.fm Call List Management Nur für den internen Gebrauch To start Call List Management in the optiClient office: Select the Caller- and call records tab in the Telephone directory window. Selecting a Call List To display one of the call lists indicated above, select it from the list box in the Call List Man- agement function or click the corresponding icon: Symbol Call list Missed calls Received calls Extensions not reached Extensions reached Calls made (= received calls + extensions reached) A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 10-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 158. 8ruflisten.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Call List Management Calling a Party from a Call List Activate the desired call list. Then click the relevant caller or called party within this list and choose Call. Deleting a Call List To delete a call list, mark the list to be deleted and click Delete records. When you delete the call list for calls made, both the list of received calls and the list of stations reached are deleted. A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual 10-3
  • 159. 8ruflisten.fm Call List Management Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 10-4 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 160. opticl130v40SIX.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Index Index Z Answering calls 8-1 Associated dial 7-3 A Associated serv. 7-3 Accept call 7-4 Attention ring volume 4-6, 5-7 Accepting a call 4-9, 8-1 Available 7-6 Account code 7-3 ACD 8-27 C ACD Functions 8-27 Call Charge Display 8-19 ACD logged on 8-27 Call Forwarding 8-17 ACD logoff 8-29 Call forwarding ACD logon 8-28 disabling 8-17 ACD Night Service enabling 8-17 diactivating 8-32 Call List enabling 8-32 selecting 10-2 ACD not available 8-27 Call list ACD Post-Processing 8-30 calling a party 10-3 ACD post-processing 8-27, 8-30 deleting 10-3 diabling 8-30 Call List management 4-7 ACD status 5-14, 8-27 Call list management 5-8, 8-14, 10-1 ACD unavailability Call on hold 5-28 anabling 8-31 Call pickup 8-1 disabling 8-31 Call pickup group 8-1 ACD waiting calls 8-32 Call pickup in a call pickup group 8-1 Activate/deactivate headset 5-7 Call pickup, directed 8-1 Activating caller ID suppression 8-5 Call status display 5-28 Activating do not disturb 8-2 Call Transfer 8-11 Activating Night Service 8-18 Call wait.term.on 7-3 Activating ringer off 8-3 Call wait.trm.off 7-3 Activating ringer on 8-3 Call Waiting 8-16 Active call 5-28 Call waiting 7-3 Adding a party to the conference 7-3 Call waiting tone Administration rights 4-12, 5-12 enable 8-16 administration rights 4-12 Callback 8-15 Administration tool 3-3 Caller ID suppression 8-5 Advisory msg. off 7-3 Caller List 7-3 Advisory msg. on 7-3 Calls in queue 7-6 Answer call 7-4 Calls made 10-1, 10-2 Answer page (not for U.S.) 7-4 canonical format 9-6 Answer text 8-23 Change code 8-20 cancel 8-23 Change PIN 7-3 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual Z-1
  • 161. opticl130v40SIX.fm Index Nur für den internen Gebrauch Change Speed-dial (station) 7-6 Electronic Telephone Directory 9-1 Changeover off 7-3 E-mailing contacts 9-9 Changeover on 7-3 En-bloc sending 7-3 Changing Codes 8-20 End Conference 8-10 Code key 8-19 End conference 7-3 Conference 7-3 Ending a consultation call 8-9 Conference call 5-28 ETD 9-1 Conferencing 8-10 Exit 3-22 Configuring answer text 8-23 Expanding a Conference 8-10 Connecting conference parties 8-10 Extended Dialing Functions 8-7 Consult 7-3 Extensions not reached 10-1, 10-2 Consultation Hold 8-9 Extensions reached 10-1, 10-2 Control Relay Off 7-3 Control Relay On 7-3 F conventions 1-5 Forward Line Off 7-4 D On 7-4 Data Protection and Data Security 1-9 Forwarding off 7-4 Deactivating caller ID suppression 8-5 Forwarding on 7-4 Deactivating do not disturb 8-2 Default Settings 3-2 H Default settings 3-3, 3-5 Handset 3-16 Deleting Callback Orders 8-15 Hardware requirements 1-3 Dial 7-3 Headset 7-4 Dial prefix 3-15, 8-7 HF answerback off 7-4 Dialing a party 8-5 HF answerback on 7-4 Direct access 5-27 Hotline 7-4 DISA 7-3 Hunting group 8-25 Disable Call Waiting 8-16 activating 8-25 Display Mode 5-15 deactivating 8-25 Display mode 4-15 Displaying Callback Orders 8-15 I Displaying Sent Infos 8-22 Incoming call 5-28 DND off 7-4 Infos 8-21 DND on 7-4 Initiating a Conference 8-10 Do not disturb feature 8-2 Initiating a consultation call 8-9 Door opener off 7-4 Initiating callback orders 8-15 Door opener on 7-4 Initiating calls 8-5 Drop last conf. party (only for U.S.) 7-3 Installation 2-1, 10-1 DTMF dialing 7-4 Installation Components 2-3 DTMF suffix dialing 8-24 Internal DISA 7-3 DTMF transmission 8-24 J E Join hunt group 7-4 Editing a Telephone Directory Entry 9-7 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 Z-2 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 162. opticl130v40SIX.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Index K O Key captions 4-9 Open door 7-4 Key Modules 4-8 optiClient easyCom 2-13 Key modules 4-14 optiClient installation 2-12 optiClient phone 2-13 L Options 4-13, 5-13 Language selection 2-12 Outgoing call 5-28 language selection 2-12 Override 7-4 Leave all groups 7-4 Leave hunt group 7-4 P License 2-2, 3-6 Page 7-4 License key 3-6 Park a call 7-4 License number 3-2 Parking a call 8-12 location information 2-10 Parking Calls 8-12 Location properties 2-2 PC keyboard 4-4 Lock all phones 7-4 PC Performance 3-2, 3-7 Log off 7-6 Personal phone book 3-5 log off 7-5 Personal telephone directory 9-1 Log on 7-6 Phone book management 4-7 log on 7-5 Phone lock Logged on 8-27 disabling 8-20 Logging in 3-12 enabling 8-19 Login (Logon) 3-12 Phone Test 7-4 Loudspeaker volume control 4-5, 5-6 Pickup - directed 7-4 Pickup - group 7-4 M Profile File 3-2, 3-12 Mailbox 7-5 Profile file 3-4 Microphone volume control 4-5 Prog. feature key 7-5 Mikrofon ausschalten 8-4 Programming function keys 5-9 Minimizing the program to a button in the taskbar 4-3 Q Missed calls 10-1, 10-2 QoS (Quality of Service) 2-4, 3-2 Monitoring 7-4 Quit and return 7-3 Mute off 7-4 Mute on 7-4 R Reading Infos 8-21 N Received calls 10-1, 10-2 Night answer off 7-4 Redial 7-5, 8-14 Night answer on 7-4 Reference Manuals 1-5 Night Service 8-32 Reject call 7-5 Night service 8-18 Rejoin all groups 7-4 deactivating 8-18 Release 7-5 Not available 7-6 Relocate station 7-5 notational conventions 1-5 Remote Access 3-12 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual Z-3
  • 163. opticl130v40SIX.fm Index Nur für den internen Gebrauch Remove party 7-3 Suppress call ID 7-5 Reserve trunk 7-5 symbols in manual 1-5 Reset services 7-5 System tray 5-5 Resetting functions 8-26 Restore caller ID 7-5 T Restoring the program from a button in the Taskbar 4-3, 5-5 taskbar 4-3 TDS codes 8-24 Retrieve call 7-4 Tel. data service 7-5 Retrieve line 7-5 Telephone Data Service 8-24 Retrieving a Parked Call 8-12 Telephone directory 4-17, 5-8, 5-16, 9-1 Return to held call 7-3 adding an entry 9-5 Ring tone 4-6, 5-7 calling a contact 9-9 Ring Transfer finding a contact 9-8 Off 7-5 Telephone directory entry On 7-5 deleting 9-7 Ring volume 4-6, 5-7 Telephone directory server (LDAP) 4-17, 5- Ringer cutoff off 7-5 16 Ringer cutoff on 7-5 Telephony 5-19 Ringer off 8-3 Teleworking 3-14 Ringing group off 7-5 Temporary MSN (not for U.S.) 7-5 Ringing group on 7-5 Temporary Phone 7-5 Room monitor 7-5 Terminating Calls 4-9, 8-8 Ruflisten 4-7 Timed reminder off 7-5 Timed reminder on 7-5 S Toggle 8-11 Safety Information 1-6 Toggle/Connect 7-5 safety information Trace call 7-5 caution 1-7 Transfer 7-5, 8-11 danger 1-7 Transfer/US warning 1-7 Accept call UK Save number 7-3 Accept 7-3 Select language 7-5 Trunk Flash 7-5 Selecting the Telephone Directory 9-3 Trunk FWD on 7-4 Sending Infos 8-21 Trunk FWD out 7-4 Shift Key 7-5 Turning on the microphone 8-4 Show call charges (own telephone) 7-5 Software requirements 1-3 U Sound card 3-17 UCD 7-6 Speaker 3-17 UCD night off 7-6 Speaker call 7-5 UCD night on 7-6 Speed-dial keys 5-20 Update 4-11, 5-12 Speed-dial keys (icons) 5-20 US Start conference 7-3 Callback UK Starting the program 3-11 Set Callback 7-6 Directory UK A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 Z-4 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual
  • 164. opticl130v40SIX.fm Nur für den internen Gebrauch Index Phonebook 7-3 View messages UK Display Messages 7-5 Use speed-dialing 7-6 User interface 4-2, 5-1, 6-1 V Verification window 9-6 View call charges (other party’s telephone) 7- 5 View callbacks/Delete 7-6 View conf parties 7-3 View sent message 7-5 Viewing Options of the Telephone Directory 9-4 Views 4-21 Voice compression 3-15 W Waiting tone off 7-3 Waiting tone on 7-3 Work off 7-6 Work on 7-6 Work time 8-30 A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual Z-5
  • 165. opticl130v40SIX.fm Index Nur für den internen Gebrauch A31003-G2540-A100-3-76A9, 04/2003 Z-6 optiClient 130 V4.0, User Manual